Kia 16sedona En
User Manual: Kia 2016 KIA Sedona Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 644 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-
tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2015 Kia Canada Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system or translation in
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
from Kia Canada Inc..
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
1
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol. . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . . 1-7
Introduction
21
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this
manual. These WARNINGs were pre-
pared to enhance your personal safe-
ty.You should carefully read and follow
ALL procedures and recommenda-
tions provided in these WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
✽✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situa-
tion in which harm, serious bod-
ily injury or death could result if
the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
13
Introduction
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. (Do not use methanol blend-
ed fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol.
Ethanol provides less energy than
gasoline and it attracts water, and it
is thus likely to reduce your fuel effi-
ciency and could lower your MPG
results.
Methanol may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
Introduction
41
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible
with your vehicle. Use of “E85” may
result in poor engine performance
and damage to your vehicle's engine
and fuel system. Kia recommends
that customers do not use fuel with an
ethanol content exceeding 10%.
✽✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage to
the fuel system or any performance
problems caused by the use of “E85”
fuel.
✽✽ NOTICE
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
Other fuels
Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene
(Fe), and Other metalic additives,
may cause vehicle and engine dam-
age or cause misfiring, poor acceler-
ation, engine stalling, catalyst melt-
ing, clogging, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
15
Introduction
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels con-
taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
✽✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage to
the fuel system and any perform-
ance problems that are caused by
the use of fuels containing methanol
or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful man-
ganese-based fuel additives Such as
MMT(Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does not
recommend the use of gasoline con-
taining MMT. This type of fuel can
reduce vehicle performance and affect
your emission control system. The
malfunction indicator lamp on the clus-
ter may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and damage components
of the fuel system, engine control sys-
tem and emission control system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help pre-
vent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance perform-
ance of the Emission Control System.
For more information on TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, please go to the
website (www.toptiergas.com)
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive should
be added to the fuel tank at every
12,000 km or every engine oil change
is recommended. Additives are avail-
able from your authorized Kia dealer
along with information on how to use
them. Do not mix other additives.
Introduction
61
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correct-
ly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (high-
er ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. In other
words they are not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as con-
ventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers. Again, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the
“Reducing the risk of a rollover”
driving guidelines, in section 5 of
this manual.
No special break-in period is need-
ed. By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 1,000 km (600
miles) you may add to the perform-
ance, economy and life of your vehi-
cle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera-
tion.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
17
Introduction
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
Exterior overview I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood......................................................4-56
2. Head lamp..................................4-132, 7-75
3. Fog lamp....................................4-137, 7-78
4. Wheel and tire................................7-49, 8-4
5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-77
6. Sunroof..................................................4-62
7. Front windshield wiper blades....4-139, 7-43
8. Windows................................................4-51
9. Parking assist system .........................4-125
OYP014001K
■Front view
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
23
Your vehicle at a glance
10. Door locks ...........................................4-25
11. Fuel filler lid.........................................4-58
12. Rear combination lamp .......................7-80
13. High mounted stop lamp .....................7-83
14. Rear window wiper blade.........4-140, 7-44
15. Tailgate..........................................4-31, 42
16. Antenna.............................................4-201
17. Rearview camera ..............................4-129
18. Parking assist system ............4-121, 4-125
OYP014002K
■Rear view
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle...................................4-27
2. Power window switch...............................4-51
3. Central door lock switch ..........................4-28
4. Power window and rear sunroof
lock button................................................4-54
5. Outside rearview mirror control...............4-78
6. Outside rearview mirror folding switch....4-79
7. Fuel filler lid open switch .........................4-58
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ...........................................4-83
9. BSD ON/OFF button ...............................5-56
10. LDWS ON/OFF button ..........................5-64
11. AC inverter button................................4-193
12. ESC OFF button....................................5-25
13. Steering wheel.......................................4-67
14. Tilt and telescopic steering
control lever ...........................................4-68
15. Inner panel fuse panel...........................7-68
16. Brake pedal............................................5-19
17. Parking brake pedal...............................5-21
18. Hood release lever.................................4-56
19. Seat..........................................................3-2
OYP014003N
❈ The actual interior in the vehicle may differ from the illustration
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
25
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Audio remote control buttons ............4-201
2. Driver’s front air bag............................3-73
3. Horn.....................................................4-70
4. Instrument cluster................................4-82
5. Wiper and washer control lever.........4-138
6. Ignition switch or
Engine START/STOP button..........5-6, 5-9
7. Cruise control button or smart
cruise control button...................5-33, 5-37
8. Audio .................................................4-201
9. Hazard warning flasher .........................6-2
10. Climate control system.........4-146, 4-162
11. Shift lever...........................................5-13
12. Front seat warmer /
Seat cooler...........................4-190, 4-191
13. Steering wheel warmer
ON/OFF Button .................................4-69
14. Active ECO button or
Drive mode button....................5-53, 5-54
15. Parking assist system
ON/OFF button................................4-125
16. 360° Camera monitoring system
ON/OFF button................................4-130
17. Center console storage box ............4-187
18. Sunglasses holder...........................4-188
19. USB charger....................................4-195
20. Power outlet.....................................4-192
21. AC inverter ......................................4-193
22. Glove box ........................................4-188
23. Passenger's front air bag ..................3-73
OYP014004N
❈ The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration
Your vehicle at a glance
62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OYP074061N
❈The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-33
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-37
3. Radiator cap .....................................7-34
4. Fuse box ...........................................7-64
5. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-30
6. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-30
7. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-35
8. Battery terminal ................................7-46
9. Air cleaner.........................................7-38
10.Power steering fluid(if equipped) .....7-36
■■Gasoline Engine (Lambda 3.3L)
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
• Driver position memory system (for power seat). . . 3-10
• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• Seatback pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
• Headrest (for rear seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
• Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Seat belt precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Air bag
- advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . . 3-59
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
• Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)
(5) Driver position memory
(6) Headrest
2nd / 3rd row seat
(7) Forward and backward
(8) Seatback angle and folding
(9) Walk in
(10) Headrest
(11) Armrest
(12) Seatback angle and folding
(13) Seat sinking
(14) Headrest
SEATS
OYP036200N
Manual seat
Power seat
33
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)
(5) Driver position memory
(6) Headrest
2nd / 3rd row seat
(7) Forward and backward
(8) Left and right
(9) Seatback angle and folding
(10) Leg support
(11) Walk in
(12) Headrest
(13) Armrest
(14) Seatback angle and folding
(15) Seat sinking
(16) Headrest
OYP034297N
■For SXL package
Safety features of your vehicle
43
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impact-
ing you or other passengers.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Do not place anything in the dri-
ver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the dri-
ver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
The driver must advise the pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the occupant's hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt, applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen.
1KMN3662
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sit-
ting cushions.
The passenger's hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt during an accident or a sud-
den stop.
35
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Unexpected
Seat Movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpect-
ed movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear seat-
backs
Always lock the rear seatback
before driving. Failure to do so
could result in passengers or
objects being thrown forward
injuring vehicle occupants.
WARNING - Luggage and
Cargo
Do not stack pile or stack lug-
gage or cargo higher than the
seatback in the cargo area. In an
accident the cargo could strike
and injury a passenger. If
objects are large, heavy or must
be piled, they must be secured
in the cargo area.
WARNING - Cargo Area
Do not allow passengers to ride
in the cargo area under any cir-
cumstance. The cargo area is
solely for the purpose of trans-
porting luggage or cargo.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback and seatback
adjustment.
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of the your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do so
can result in air bag inflation
injuries to the driver.
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Front seat adjustment - manual
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or back-
ward :
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
WARNING - Seat
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
WARNING - Small
Objects
Use extreme caution when pick-
ing small objects trapped under
the seats or between the seat
and the center console. Your
hands might be cut or injured
by the sharp edges of the seats
mechanism.
OYP034002
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback :
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat,
push the lever upwards or down-
wards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
OYP034004OYP034003 OYP034005
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so you can easily con-
trol the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel. When in operation, the power seat-
consumes a large amount of electri-
cal power. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, don’t adjust
the power seat longer than neces-
sary while the engine is not running.
CAUTION - Power seat
adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equip-
ment.
CAUTION - Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor or
electrical components.
WARNING - Unattended
children
Do not leave children unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Seat height (if equipped)
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or press down to
lower the front part of the seat cush-
ion. Pull the rear portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or press down
to lower the rear part of the seat
cushion. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.
OYP034008NOYP034006N OYP034007N
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support switch
on the side of the drivers seat. Press
the front portion of the switch (1) to
increase support, or the rear portion
of the switch (2) to decrease support.
Move the support position up and
down by pressing the switch (3) or (4).
Driver position memory system
(if equipped, for power seat)
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat and outside rearview mirror
position with a simple button opera-
tion. By saving the desired position
into the system memory, different
drivers can reposition the driver seat
based upon their driving preference.
If the battery is disconnected, the
desired seat position memory will
need to be re-saved.
OYP034009N
OYP034025
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury.
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
engine start/stop button is ON or
ignition switch ON.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and out-
side rearview mirror comfortable
for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
✽✽NOTICE
When recalling an adjustment mem-
ory button while sitting in the vehi-
cle, you can be surprised by the set-
ting chosen if the memory has been
adjusted by someone else. If that
occurs, immediately push the seat
position control knob in the direc-
tion of the desired position to stop
further undesired movement.
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
engine start/stop button is ON or
ignition switch ON.
2. To recall the position in the memo-
ry, press the desired memory but-
ton (1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver’s seat will
automatically adjust to the stored
position.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver’s seat while the system is
recalling the stored position will
cause the movement to stop and
move in the direction that the control
switch is moved.
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The system will move the driver's
seat automatically as follows :
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the ignition key is
removed.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the ignition key is
inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the OFF
position.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this fea-
ture. Refer to "User settings" in chap-
ter 4.
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a rear collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
OYP034285N
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
✽✽ NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
OYP034010
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle. OYFH034205
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Removal and reinstallation
To remove the headrest :
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
OYP034012
OYP034013N
■Type A
■Type B
OYP034014
OYP034015N
■Type A
■Type B
315
Safety features of your vehicle
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height. Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
OYP044077K
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure vehicle occupants.
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Rear seat adjustment
Forward and backward
(2nd row seat)
To move the seat forward or back-
ward :
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
❈7-seater SXL Seat
To move the seat inward, first turn
the left/right control lever, and then
move the seat to the farthest back
position.
Left and Right
(2nd row seat, SXL package)
To move the seat left side or right
side :
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move left side and right
side without using the lever. If the seat
moves, it is not locked properly.
OYP034293N
OYP034202N
OYP034291N
■for SXL package
317
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback :
1. Pull up the seatback recline lever
(for 2nd row outboard seat) or
strap (for 2nd row center or 3rd
row seat).
2. Hold the lever or strap and adjust
the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever or strap and
make sure the seatback is locked
in place. (The lever MUST return
to its original position for the seat-
back to lock.)
OYP034204N
■2nd row seat
OYP034292N
■2nd row seat for SXL package
OYP034205N
■3rd row seat
OYP034206N
■2nd row center seat (if equipped)
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Walk-in seat
(2nd row seat)
To get in or out from the 3rd row seat,
1. Lift the armrest up and lower the
head rest to the lowest position (if
necessary).
2. Pull up the walk-in lever (1) or pull
the walk-in strap (2) on the 2nd
row seat to allow passenger to exit
3rd row seat.
3. At this time, 2nd row seat position
will be changed to stand up posi-
tion, and the head rest will be fold-
ed automatically. After getting in or
out, push the 2nd row seat to the
original position until it clicks into
place and check the head rest
position (unfolded position). Make
sure that the seat is locked in
place.
Walk-out seat
(2nd row seat for SXL package)
To get out from the 3rd row seat,
1. Lift the armrest up , lower the
headrests to the lowest position
and slide the seat inside. (if neces-
sary).
2. Pull the walk-in strap (1) on the
2nd row seat when the passenger
get out from 3rd row seat.
3. Push the 2nd row seat to forward.
After getting out, push the 2nd row
seat to the original position until it
clicks into place. Make sure that
the seat is locked in place.
OYP034209N
OYP034210N
OYP034299N
319
Safety features of your vehicle
Leg support
(2nd row seat for SXL package)
To use the leg support :
1. Pull the leg support lever up and
hold it.
2. Adjust the angle and length of the
leg support while holding the leg
support. When using the leg rest,
move the seat to the inner position,
and then toward the back.If the seat
is not moved far back, it may come
in contact with the first row seat.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the leg support is locked in place.
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
OYP034294N
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the 2nd
row seat while the vehicle is
moving or the seat is occupied
as the seat may suddenly move
and cause the passenger on the
seat to be injured. WARNING - Folded down
seatback
Never allow passengers sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the vehicle is moving.This
is not a proper seating position
and no seat belts are available
for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
203
To fold down the rear seatback
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seat-
back and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
WARNING - Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not extend
higher than the top of the front
seatbacks.This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury
or damage during sudden stops.
OYP034214N
OYP034267N
OYP034212N
■2nd row center seat (for 8 passenger vehicle)
321
Safety features of your vehicle
4. Pull on the seatback folding lever
or strap, then fold the seat toward
the front of the vehicle. When you
return the seatback to its upright
position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on
the top of the seatback.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever or strap. Pull
the seatback firmly until it clicks
into place. Make sure the seatback
is locked in place.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
OYP034216N
OYP034218N
OYP034219N
■2nd row seat ■2nd row center seat (for 8 passenger vehicle)
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Removing the tumble seat
(for 8 passenger vehicle)
1. Insert the seat belt in the belt
assembly cover.
2. Insert the seat belt buckle in the
seat cushion pocket.
3. Lower the headrest to the lowest
position.
4. Slide the seat to the farthest rear-
ward.
5. Fold the seat back by pull up the
recline strap.
6. Pull the removal strap and lift the
rear portion of the seat cushion.
OYP034223N
OYP034220N
OYP034267N
OYP034221N
323
Safety features of your vehicle
7. Pull up the catch release lever
under the front of the seat cushion
while reclining the folded seat
rearward slightly to release the
front catches from the anchors.
8. Remove the entire seat from the
floor.
Installing the tumble seat
(for 8 passenger vehicle)
1. Put the front anchor strikers along
the front anchors on the floor.
2. Insert two front anchor strikers into
the front anchors.
3. Lift the rear portion of the seat
cushion then push down firmly to
lock the catches into the rear
anchors until an audible “click” is
heard.
OYP034225NOYP034227N
OYP034228N
Safety features of your vehicle
243
4. Make sure the green mark on the
rear seat cushion frame is visible
and the catches are locked in posi-
tion by moving the seat forward
and backward or lifting the front
portion of the seat. If the green
mark is invisible and the seat
moves, it is not locked properly.
5. Pull up the seatback recline strap.
6. Lift and push the seatback back-
ward firmly until it clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
7. Return the seat belt to the proper
position.
If the rear catches of the seat are
locked into the rear anchors (2) while
the front catches are not locked into
the front anchors (1), do the follow-
ings to release the rear catches from
the rear anchors.
OYP034232N
WARNING - Installing or
removing the tumble seat
Do not install or remove the
tumble (2nd row center) seat, if
there are occupants in the 3rd
row seats, as this may injure
occupants.
OYP034233N
OYP034235N
325
Safety features of your vehicle
Pull the removal strap and lift the
rear portion of the seat cushion.
Then the rear catches will be
released.
Remove the seat while lifting up the
rear portion of seat cushion and then
reinstalling the tumble seat.
Stowing the rear seat
- 3rd row seat
The rear seat can be folded and
stowed in the luggage compartment
to provide additional cargo space.
To stow the rear seat :
1. Lower the headrest to the lowest
position. To stow easily, adjust the
seatback to upright position.
(if necessary)
OYP034223N
OYP034240N
Safety features of your vehicle
263
2. Pull up the seat by using the stow-
ing lever.
3. Stow the seat by pushing down
firmly.
Make sure there is no body or object
around the seat and be careful not to
injure your hands or body under the
seat or in the moving parts when
stowing or reinstalling the seat.
OYP034241N
OYP034242N
CAUTION - To stow 3rd
row seat
Do not stow the 3rd row seat
when the seat back is folded
down. It may damage the 3rd
seat mechanism.
OYP034304N
327
Safety features of your vehicle
To use the rear seat :
1. Lift the seat by pulling up the stow-
ing lever.
2. Release the lever and push the
seat forward firmly until it clicks
into place to insert the catches
into the anchors.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not push down the upper part of
the seatback when pushing the seat
forward. Doing so can prevent the
catches from being locked in posi-
tion.
3. Make sure the catches are locked
in position by moving the seat for-
ward and backward or lifting the
front portion of the seat. If the seat
moves, it is not locked properly.
OYP034243NOYP034286N OYP034287N
Safety features of your vehicle
283
4. Pull out and hold the folding strap.
5. Hold the seat back when you
adjust the seat back angle until it
clicks into place and then release
the folding strap.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
When you fold the rear (2nd and/or
3rd row) seatback, insert the buckle
in the pocket between the rear seat-
back and cushion. Doing so can pre-
vent the buckle from being damaged
by the rear seatback.
When returning the rear (2nd and/or
3rd row) seatbacks to the upright
position, remember to return the rear
shoulder belts to their proper posi-
tion. Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
and the parking brake is securely
applied whenever loading or unload-
ing cargo. Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if the
shift lever is inadvertently moved to
another position.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in
the rear seats, since they can-
not be properly secured and
may hit vehicle occupants in a
frontal collision.
OYP034305N
329
Safety features of your vehicle
Armrest (2nd row seat)
The 2nd row seats have the armrest
located on the side of seatback.
Type A
To use the armrest, swing down the
armrest to the lowest position.
Type B
To use the armrest, press the
release button
(1) on the armrest and adjust the
angle to the desired position. And
then release the button (1).
OUN026140
WARNING - 3rd row seat
3rd row occupants should always
remain in the center of the seat
cushion so the occupants head
is protected by the headrest.
If not, the tailgate may hit the
occupant's head, which could
cause injury.
OYP034254N
OYP034300N/Q
■Type A
■Type B (for SXL package)
Safety features of your vehicle
303
Seatback pocket (for SXL package)
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the 2nd row outboard
seatbacks.
Headrest (for rear seat)
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
OYP034288N
* : if equipped
*
OYP034255N
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure vehicle occupants.
331
Safety features of your vehicle
For maximum effectiveness in case of
an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the head-
rest is at the same height as the cen-
ter of gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of
most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
Adjusting the height up and down
ODM032054
OYP034301N
OYP034302N
■2nd row outboard
OYP034298N
OYP034303N
■2nd row for SXL package
■3rd row
■2nd row center (if equipped)
Safety features of your vehicle
323
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position
(1).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and reinstallation
To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
After installing the headrest, make
sure that it is installed in the right
direction.
A headrest installed reversely could
increase whiplash injury during rear
impact.
OYP034248N
OYP034250N
WARNING
The second row headrest is
equipped with auto-folding
function.The cable may become
dislocated or damaged when
the headrest is removed, and
may lead to auto-folding func-
tion failure.
333
Safety features of your vehicle
2nd row outboard headrest
The headrest will fold down automat-
ically when the seat is in the walk in
potion.
Always be sure the headrest has
locked into position after you return
the seatback.
Forward and backward adjustment
(2nd row seat for SXL package)
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward or backward by pulling the
lower part of the headrest forward or
backward to the desired detent in the
direction of the arrow. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.
Wing-out
(2nd row seat for SXL package)
For rear outboard passenger's com-
fort, the ends of the headrest can be
adjusted inward.
OYP034252N
OYP034296NOYP034295N
Safety features of your vehicle
343
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
• For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section of
the belt across the abdominal area
must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING - Twisted seat
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly pro-
tect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
WARNING - Shoulder Belt
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can-
not protect the occupant in a
crash.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the seat
belt repeatedly while driving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are hard
or can break easily.
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate pursuant to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in "ON" position.
1GQA2083
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
*1Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*2The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Seat belt warning
(for front passenger’s seat)
The front passenger's seat belt
warning light will activate to the fol-
lowing table when the ignition switch
is in "ON" position.
*1The seat belt warning light will go off if
the vehicle speed decreases below 5
km/h (3 mph). If the vehicle speed
increases above 5 km/h (3 mph), the
warning light will blink again.
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt Vehicle
Speed Light-Blink
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Unbuckled Above 10 km/h
(6mph) Continuously
Buckled 6 seconds
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Above 10 km/h
(6mph) Continuously *1
Below 10 km/h
(6mph) None
OYP034258N
OYP034257N
■Type A
■Type B
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt Vehicle
Speed Light-Blink Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph) 6 seconds None
5 km/h~
10 km/h 6 seconds
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
↓
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)
6 seconds *1
↓
Stop *2
337
Safety features of your vehicle
• You can find the front passenger's
seat belt warning light on the cen-
ter fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat
is not occupied, the seat belt warn-
ing light will blink for 6 seconds.
• The seat belt warning light can
blink when a briefcase or purse is
placed on the front passenger
seat.
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front passen-
ger's seat belt warning system. It is
important for the driver to instruct the
passenger as to the proper seating
instructions as contained in this
manual.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt :
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
B180A01NF-1
B200A02NF
Safety features of your vehicle
383
✽✽NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
seat belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. Then
you will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi-
tions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
near the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button
(2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
OYP034056
Front seat
339
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt :
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat posi-
tions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recom-
mended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place any infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion
of the seat belt is adjusted manually
so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an acci-
dent could leave you with dam-
aged seat belts that will not pro-
vide protection in the event of
another collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
403
✽✽NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection
for seated passengers in either emer-
gency or automatic locking modes,
have the seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for
improved convenience. The auto-
matic locking function is intended to
facilitate child restraint installation.
To convert from the automatic lock-
ing feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuck-
led seat belt to fully retract. To release the seat belt :
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) on the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
CAUTION
Do NOT fold down the left por-
tion of the rear seat back when
the rear center seat belt is buck-
led. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the
rear center seat belt before fold-
ing down the left portion of the
rear seat back. If the rear center
seat belt is buckled when the
left portion of the rear seat back
is folded down, distortion and
damage to the top portion of the
seat back and seat belt garnish
may result, causing the seat
back to lock into the folded
down position.
B210A01NF-1
341
Safety features of your vehicle
3 Point rear center belt (for 2nd
and/ 3rd center seat, if equipped)
To fasten the rear center belt
1. Pull out the mini tongue from hole
on the belt assembly cover (1) and
then slowly pull the seat belt out
from the retractor.
2. Pull out the tongue plate from the
holder on the seat belt (2).
3. Insert the mini tongue (A) into the
open end of the anchor connector
(C) until an audible “click" is heard,
indicating the latch is locked. Make
sure the belt is not twisted.
OYP034259N/Q
OYP034260N/Q
OYP034261N
Safety features of your vehicle
423
4. Pull the tongue plate (B) and
insert the tongue plate (B) into the
open end of the buckle (D) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating
the latch is locked. Make sure the
belt is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
There will be an audible “click” when
the tab locks in the buckle. The seat
belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt is
adjusted manually so that it fits snug-
ly around your hips, if you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around.
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
WARNING
When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all tongue
plates and buckles. If any
tongue plate or buckle is not
locked, it will increase the
chance of injury in the event of
collision.
OYP034262N
343
Safety features of your vehicle
To unfasten the rear center belt
1. Press the release button on the
buckle (D) and remove the tongue
plate (B) from the buckle (D).
2. To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the tongue plate or similar
small rigid device into the web
release hole (C). Pull up on the
seat belt web (A) and allow the
webbing to retract automatically.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the
holder (1) in seat belt and then
insert the mini tongue into the hole
on the belt assembly cover.
OYP034264N
OYP034265N/Q
OYP034266N
OYP034263N
Safety features of your vehicle
443
Stowing the rear seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when not
in use.
Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
CAUTION
Remove the seat belt from the
guides before using. If you pull
on the seat belt when it is stored
in the guides, it may damage the
guides and/or belt webbing.
OYP034214N
OYP034267N
OYP034212N
■2nd row seat (for 2nd row center seat, if equipped)
■3rd row
345
Safety features of your vehicle
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening
Device)). The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated, when a
frontal collision is severe enough,
together with the air bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occu-
pant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
sions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
tem activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
OXMA033101
Safety features of your vehicle
463
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration :
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
✽✽NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's seat belt pre-tensioner
system may be activated not only
in certain frontal collision but also
in certain side collision or rollover,
if the vehicle is equipped with a
side or curtain air bag.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
ODMESA2024
WARNING - Skin Irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irrita-
tion and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.
347
Safety features of your vehicle
If the pre-tensioner seat belt system
are not working properly, this warning
light will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the
SRS air bag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition switch is
turned ON, or if it remains illuminated
after illuminating for approximately 6
seconds, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-
tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag
system as soon as possible. Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-
ate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
be replaced, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use
of these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
WARNING - Hot preten-
sioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pre-
tensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
Safety features of your vehicle
483
✽✽NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat by
a child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the safety standards
of your country. Before buying any
child restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets
safety standards of your country. The
restraint must be appropriate for
your child's height and weight. Check
the label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to “Child restraint
system” in this chapter.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened and
snugged on the hips and as low as
possible. Check if the belt fits period-
ically. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the
rear seat. If a larger child (over age
12) must be seated in the front seat,
the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and
under in the front seat. NEVER place
a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
349
Safety features of your vehicle
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint sys-
tem. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to your
child's neck, throat and face. WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
Safety features of your vehicle
503
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident.This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Pinched seat
belt
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched webbing/
buckle may become damaged
and could fail during a collision
or sudden stop.
351
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the vehicle should
sit in the rear seat and must always
be properly restrained to minimize
the risk of injury in an accident, sud-
den stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Larger children not in
a child restraint should use one of
the seat belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt,
or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH
anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat
belts, and fits your child.
Follow all the instructions provided
by the manufacturer when installing
the child restraint system.
When the child restraint system is
not in use, store it in the luggage
area or fasten it with a seat belt so
that it will not be thrown forward in
case of a sudden stop or an acci-
dent.
WARNING - Restraint
location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. A child riding in the front
passenger seat can be forceful-
ly struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING - Hot child
restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required.The child seat or infant seat
should be of appropriate size for the
child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
WARNING - Holding chil-
dren
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle.The car can heat up
very quickly, resulting in injuries
to the child in the vehicle.
WARNING - Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
CRS09
OUN026150
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
353
Safety features of your vehicle
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat,
because of the danger an inflating
passenger-side air bag could impact
the rear-facing child restraint and kill
the child.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this section, have the
system checked immediately by your
authorized Kia dealer.
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following :
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
E2MS103005
OEN036101
Safety features of your vehicle
543
If the vehicle headrest prevents prop-
er installation of a child seat (as
described in the child seat system
manual), the headrest of the respec-
tive seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-
ing” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
OEN036103OEN036102
355
Safety features of your vehicle
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the preced-
ing seven steps must be followed
each time a child restraint is
installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully. When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Auto Lock” mode
to the emergency lock mode for
normal adult usage.
OEN036104
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system. If the
retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your
vehicle turns or stops suddenly.
Safety features of your vehicle
563
Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchor system
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the back of the rear cush-
ions.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback. For vehicles
with adjustable headrests, route
the tether strap under the headrest
and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap
over the top of the seatback. In
case of interference between the
child restraint seat and the head-
rest remove the particular head
restraint for better fitment of the
child restraint seat.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
Check that the child restraint system
is secure by pushing and pulling it in
different directions. Incorrectly fitted
child restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or serious
injury.
OYP034273N
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break.
OYP034270N
OYP034269N
■2nd row outboard seat
■3rd row seat
357
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
patible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mount-
ed attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located
on the 2nd row outboard seat backs
and 3rd row right seat back to indi-
cate the position of the lower anchors
for child restraints.
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback reclined two positions
from the most upright latched posi-
tion.
OYP034277N
Lower Anchor
WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child stran-
gulation.
OYP034289N
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Safety features of your vehicle
583
LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustration.
There is no LATCH anchor provided
for the center rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the 2nd row seat left and
right outboard seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. LATCH
lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions.You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.
OYP034277N
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
359
Safety features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYP034278N
Safety features of your vehicle
603
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START position.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of a serious
frontal collision or side collision in
order to help protect the occupants
from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehi-
cles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. The determin-
ing factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected, side
and/or curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide pro-
tection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.
The speed of the air bag inflation is
a consequence of extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu-
pant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of the air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel or passenger air
bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel or passenger
air bag.
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When inflated, the air bags make a
loud noise and leave smoke and
powder in the air inside the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After
the air bag inflates, you may feel sub-
stantial discomfort in breathing due
to the contact of your chest with both
the seat belt and the air bag, as well
as from breathing the smoke and
powder. Open your doors and/or
windows as soon as possible after
impact in order to reduce discom-
fort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING - Hot compo-
nents
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag infla-
tion.The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING - Airbag infla-
tion
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of your vehicle. A distance
of at least 10" from your chest
to the steering wheel is recom-
mended. Failure to do so can
result in airbag inflation injuries
to the driver.
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it could cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag system, which could include
your side and/or curtain air bags
used for rollover protection.
1JBH3051
W7-147
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could impact the
child.
363
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components :
(1) Driver's front air bag module
(2) Passenger's front air bag module
(3) Side air bag modules
(4) Curtain air bag modules
(5) Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
(6) Air bag warning light
(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
(8) Front impact sensors
(9) Side impact sensors
(10) PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s
seat only)
(11) Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
(12) Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
(13) Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
(14) Side pressure sensor
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
If the airbag warning light illuminated
for more than, 6 seconds after the
ignition is turned on, or of it illumi-
nates during vehicle operation, an
SRS component may not be func-
tioning properly and you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
OYP034279N
W7-147
Safety features of your vehicle
643
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
in the air bag system. Have an
authorized Kia dealer inspect the air
bag system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position. The front air bag modules are locat-
ed both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
B240B02L
Driver’s front air bag (2)
365
Safety features of your vehicle
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility
and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehi-
cle. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles if the air
bag deploys.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
Safety features of your vehicle
663
• If an air bag deploys, there may be
a loud noise followed by a fine dust
released in the vehicle. These con-
ditions are normal and are not haz-
ardous - the air bags are packed in
this fine powder. The dust generat-
ed during air bag deployment may
cause skin or eye irritation as well
as aggravate asthma for some per-
sons. Always wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly with luke-
warm water and a mild soap after
an accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or contin-
uously remains on after illuminat-
ing for about 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or after the engine is
started, comes on while driving,
the SRS is not working properly. If
this occurs, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the ignition switch.
Never remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Failure
to heed this warning will cause the
SRS air bag warning light to illumi-
nate.
Occupant Detection
System(ODS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
OYP034280N
OYP034281N
■Type A
■Type B
367
Safety features of your vehicle
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. Only the front passenger front
air bag is controlled by the Occupant
Detection System.
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag indicator.
Main components of the occu-
pant detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• An electronic system which deter-
mines whether the passenger air
bag systems should be activated
or deactivated.
• A indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by a person that the system
determines to be of appropriate size,
and he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor), the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off
and the front passenger's air bag will
be able to inflate, if necessary, in
frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Safety features of your vehicle
683
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extend-
ed, feet on the floor, and wearing the
safety belt properly) for the most
effective protection by the air bag and
the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include :
(1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-
tion.
(2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
369
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blan-
ket, front seat cover or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
*1: The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the
air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS,
thus allowing the air bag to deploy.To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat.
*2: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
Condition detected by the
occupant detection
system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
"PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF"
indicator light
SRS warning
light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult or child*1Off Off Activated
2. Child restraint system*2On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. There is a malfunction
in the system Off On Activated
WARNING - ODS System
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the Occupant
Detection System and may
result in the deactivation of the
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
703
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the door or cen-
ter console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
OVQ036013N
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load or an
active electronic device on
the front passenger seat or
seatback pocket.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OVQ036014N
- Never place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
(Continued)
371
Safety features of your vehicle
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position.
This will allow the system to detect
the person and to enable the pas-
senger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
B990A01O
Proper position WARNING - “AIR BAG
OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated, because
the air bag will not deploy in the
event of a crash.The driver must
instruct the passenger to repo-
sition himself in the seat. Failure
to properly position yourself
may lead to air bag deactivation
resulting in air bag non-deploy-
ment in a collision. If the PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica-
tor remains illuminated after the
passenger repositions them-
selves properly and the car is
restarted, it is recommended
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's
front air bag will not deploy.
Safety features of your vehicle
723
✽✽NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occu-
pant detection sensor will then clas-
sify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant detec-
tion system, never install a child
restraint system in the front pas-
senger's seat. A deploying air bag
can forcefully strike a child result-
ing in serious injuries or death. Any
child age 12 and under should ride
in the rear seat. Children too large
for child restraints should use the
available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children
of all ages are safer when
restrained in the rear seat.
• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator is illuminated when
the front passenger's seat is occu-
pied by an adult and he/she sits
properly (sitting upright with the
seatback in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor), have that person sit in the
rear seat.
Any child age 12 and under should
ride in the rear seat. Children too
large for child restraints should use
the available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained in
the rear seat.
✽✽ NOTICE
The front passenger seat, dashboard
or door should not be replaced
except by an authorized Kia dealer
using original Kia parts designed for
this vehicle and model. Any other
such replacement or modification
could adversely affect the operation
of the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
373
Safety features of your vehicle
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate because the
passenger's front air bag is connect-
ed with the occupant detection sys-
tem. If there is a malfunction of the
occupant detection system, the PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
will not illuminate and the passen-
ger's front air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's
seat
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passen-
ger seating position.
The indication of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG" locat-
ed on the air bag pad cover on the
steering wheel and the passenger's
side front panel pad above the glove
box.
OYP034040
■Driver’s front air bag
■Passenger’s front air bag OYP034039
Safety features of your vehicle
743
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger's seat belts are fastened.
These sensors provide the ability to
control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instru-
ment panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat.The occu-
pant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under cer-
tain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
chapter.
375
Safety features of your vehicle
Manufacturers are required by gov-
ernment regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifica-
tions to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. However, Kia does not
endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure of
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
the occupant detection system.
✽✽ NOTICE
The front passenger seat, dashboard
or door should not be replaced
except by an authorized Kia dealer
using original Kia parts designed for
this vehicle and model. Any other
such replacement or modification
could adversely affect the operation
of the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
provide enhanced occupant protec-
tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags
are not intended to deploy in colli-
sions in which sufficient protection
can be provided by the pre-tensioner
seat belt.
WARNING
Modification to the seat struc-
ture can cause the air bag to
deploy at a different level than
should be provided.
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
Safety features of your vehicle
763
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. However, when
frontal deployment threshold is satis-
fied at side-impact, front air bags
may deploy. In addition, front air bags
will not deploy in frontal crashes
below the deployment threshold.
Side air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat. The pur-
pose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front pas-
senger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
• The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact. However, when side deploy-
ment threshold is satisfied at front-
impact, side air bags may deploy.
• The side air bags may deploy on
the side of the impact or on both
side.
• The side and/or curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle will deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
• The side air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or
rollover situations.
OYP034064
OYP034041
377
Safety features of your vehicle
• The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's
seat belt systems and is not a sub-
stitute for them. Therefore your
seat belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in operation.
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fas-
tened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel at
the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The
passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
• If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia deal-
er. Inform the dealer that your vehi-
cle is equipped with side air bags
and an occupant detection system.
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unex-
pected deployment of the side
air bag.
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side air bag as
this may affect the deployment
of the side air bags.
Safety features of your vehicle
783
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from eject-
ing out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seat-
belts are also in use.
• The curtain air bags are designed
to deploy during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact. However, when
side deployment threshold is satis-
fied at front-impact, curtain air
bags may deploy.
• The curtain air bags may deploy on
the side of the impact or on both
side.
• Also, the curtain air bags on both
sides of the vehicle will deploy in
certain rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impact or rollover situations.
WARNING - Flying
objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
OYP034065N
OYP034066N
379
Safety features of your vehicle
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies against the
doors, put their arms on the doors,
stretch their arms out of the window
or place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are seat-
ed on seats equipped with side
impact and/or curtain air bags.
✽✽NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any com-
ponents of the side and curtain air
bag system. This should only be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
803
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module/
Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side pressure sensor
OYP034042/OYP034043/OYP034044/OYP034045/OYP034046
381
Safety features of your vehicle
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due
to the deformation of the front
bumper, front end module, body or
front doors and/or B pillar where side
collision sensors are installed. Have
the vehicle checked and repaired by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Installing bumper guards (or side
step or running board) or replacing a
bumper (or front door module) with
non-genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicle’s collision and air
bag deployment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
OYP034070
WARNING - Air bag sen-
sors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
823
Side and/or curtain air bags
Side and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact colli-
sions. They may inflate in other type
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors. Side air bag
and/or curtain air bags may also
inflate where rollover sensors indi-
cate the possibility of a rollover
occurring (even if none actually
occurs) or in other situations, incluid-
ing when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed. Even where side and/or
curtain air bags would not provide
impact protection in a rollover, how-
ever, they will deploy to prevent ejec-
tion of occupants, especially those
who are restrained with seat belts.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OYP034068
OYP034066N
383
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
OYP034071 OYP034068
OYP034070
Safety features of your vehicle
843
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in all
rollover accidents where the
SRSCM indicates that the front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
OYP034074 1VQA2091OYP034073
385
Safety features of your vehicle
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate, or continuously remains on,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized Kia dealer. Improper
handling of the SRS system may
result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one
which has been moistened with plain
water. Solvents or cleaners could
adversely affect the air bag covers
and proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to fol-
low these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
OYP034075
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the opera-
tion of your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some
required by the Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),
are attached to the sunvisor to alert
the driver and passengers of poten-
tial risks of the air bag system.
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in the
accidental inflation of the air
bags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
WARNING - Towing Vehicle
Always have the ignition off
when your vehicle is being
towed. The side air bags may
inflate if the vehicle is tilted
such as when being towed
because of the rollover sensors
in the vehicle.
OYP034284N
OYP034047N
386
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-25
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-27
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Automatic door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tailgate (for manual tailgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Power sliding door and power tailgate. . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Automatic stop and reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• How to reset the power sliding door and
power tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Power door ON/OFF button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Power sliding door operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Power tailgate operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Power tailgate non-opening conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Power tailgate opening height user setting . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Smart Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
• Rear sunroof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
• Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
• Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
• LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
• LCD modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
• Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
• Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• SCC/LDWS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• Digital speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-121
• Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Operation of the parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Non-operational conditions of parking assist system . 4-127
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
360° camera monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Headlight escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
4
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Luggage lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Rear climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
• Outside thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
• Rear climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• From the front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• From the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-180
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
4
• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
• Seat cooler (air ventilation seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-191
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
• AC inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
• USB charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-195
• Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-196
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-196
• Floor mat anchor (s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-197
• Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-197
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
• Steering wheel remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
• Aux, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-203
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-204
• CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215, 264
4
45
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe
place.(not in the vehicle)
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically. To fold the key, fold the
key manually while pressing the
release button.
FOLDING KEY
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
WARNING - Aftermarket
key
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used,
the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will contin-
ue to operate causing damage
to the starter motor and possi-
ble fire due to excessive current
in the wiring.
OYP044168N
OXMA043331
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
64
Door Lock (1)
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and tailgate will lock.The
hazard warning lights will blink
once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
OYP044170N
OYP044169K
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING - Ignition key
(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
result in serious bodily injury or
death.
47
Features of your vehicle
Door Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button(2).
2. The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
tailgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
✽✽NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
Left power sliding door opening
or closing (if equipped) (3)
When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is ON (not depressed) :
The left sliding door is opened or
closed automatically if the button is
pressed and held.
When the left sliding door is closed
and more than one door is locked, and
the button is pressed for more than
one second all doors will be unlocked.
Right power sliding door opening
or closing (if equipped) (4)
When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is ON (not depressed) :
The right sliding door is opened or
closed automatically if the button is
pressed and held.
When the right sliding door is closed
and more than one door is locked, and
the button is pressed for more than
one second all doors will be unlocked.
For detailed information refer to the
“Power sliding door and power tail-
gate“ in this chapter.
The power doors can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However, the power doors consume
large amounts of vehicle electric
power. To prevent the battery from
being discharged, do not operate
them consecutively.
Features of your vehicle
84
Tailgate unlock (5)
The tailgate is unlocked if the button
is pressed for more than 1 second.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will be
locked automatically.
• For Power Tailgate Only :
The Power Tailgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the tailgate is
opened and then closed, the tailgate
will be locked again automatically.
If the power tailgate is switched ‘Off’
using the button in the overhead con-
sole, the tailgate unlock button will
operate to unlock the tailgate as
described above.
For detailed information refer to the
“Power sliding door and power tail-
gate“ in this chapter.
Panic (6)
The horn sounds and hazard warn-
ing lights flash for about 27 seconds
if this button is pressed for more than
0.5 second. To stop the horn and
lights, press any button on the trans-
mitter.
Transmitter precautions
• The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur :
- The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating dis-
tance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sub-
station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation of
the transmitter.
49
Features of your vehicle
• When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proxim-
ity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
and receiving calls, text messag-
ing, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the transmit-
ter and your mobile phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
always try to maintain an adequate
distance between the two devices.
✽✽NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following proce-
dure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is positioned battery.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
OYDDCO2005
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
Features of your vehicle
104
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized Kia dealer for transmitter
reprogramming.
• The transmitter is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your trans-
mitter or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and may cause
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
if the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmit-
ter to heat or sunlight.
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
411
Features of your vehicle
To activate the immobilizer sys-
tem :
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system :
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys any-
where in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer
unique password and should be kept
confidential. Do not leave this num-
ber anywhere in your vehicle.
✽✽NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
✽✽NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
124
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
✽✽NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not approved by
the party responsible for compli-
ance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Limp home (override) proce-
dure
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON position, if the immobilizer
indicator ( ) goes off after blink-
ing 5 times, your transponder
equipped in the ignition key is out of
order. You cannot start the engine
without the limp home procedure. To
start the engine, you have to input
your password by using the ignition
switch. Your password is only avail-
able from an authorized Kia dealer-
ship. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
The following procedure is how to
input your password of “2345” as an
example.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. The immobilizer indicator
( ) will blink 5 times and go off
indicating the beginning of the limp
home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.
413
Features of your vehicle
3. To enter the first digit (in this
example “2”), turn the ignition
switch to the ON and ACC position
twice. Perform the same proce-
dure for the next digits between 3
seconds and 10 seconds (for
example, for “3”, turn the ignition
ON and ACC 3 times).
4. If all of the digits have been input
successfully, you have to start the
engine within 30 seconds. If you
attempt to start the engine after 30
seconds, the engine will not start
and you will have to input your
password again.
After performing the limp home pro-
cedure, you have to see an author-
ized Kia dealer immediately to
inspect and repair your ignition key
or immobilizer system.
Features of your vehicle
144
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped on the bar
code tag attached to
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an author-
ized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys
easily. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record
the code number and keep it in a
safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
Smart key function
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Tailgate) and start
the engine.
Refer to the following for more details.
SMART KEY
OYP044002K
WARNING - Ignition key
(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
result in serious bodily injury or
death.
415
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
✽✽NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m
(28~40in.) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is
in ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is
open.
OYP044003K
OYP044025K
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
164
Using the button on the smart key
1 Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the tail-
gate will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽✽NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m
(28~40in.) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7~1m (28~40in.) from
the front outside door handle, other
people can also open the doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door
or all doors, the door(s) will lock
automatically unless the door is
opened.
417
Features of your vehicle
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the tailgate will unlock.The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽✽NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.
✽✽NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
Left or Right power sliding door
opening or closing (if equipped)
This function will be operated when
the power door ON/OFF button is
ON (not depressed).
Using the power sliding door handle
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Pull the power sliding door handle
once.
3. The power sliding door will be
opened or closed automatically. At
this time, the hazard warning
lights will blink and the chime will
sound two times.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press and hold the power sliding
door open (or close) button (3), (4)
more than 1 second.
For detailed information refer to the
“Power sliding door and power tail-
gate" in this chapter.
Tailgate unlocking
Using the tailgate handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the tailgate handle button.
3. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
automatically.
✽✽NOTICE
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m
(28~40in.) from the tailgate handle.
Features of your vehicle
184
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the tailgate unlock button
(5) for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
• For Power Tailgate Only :
The Power Tailgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the tailgate is
opened and then closed, the tailgate
will be locked again automatically.
If the power tailgate is switched ‘Off’
using the button in the overhead con-
sole, the tailgate unlock button will
operate to unlock the tailgate as
described above.
For detailed information refer to the
“Power sliding door and power tail-
gate“ in this chapter.
Panic
1. Press the panic button (6) for more
than 1 second.
2.The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 27
seconds.
✽✽NOTICE
To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the smart key.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the “Engine start/stop
button” in chapter 5.
Loss of the smart key
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key,
you will not be able to start the
engine. You should immediately take
the vehicle and remaining key to your
authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehi-
cle, if necessary) to protect it from
potential theft.
419
Features of your vehicle
Smart key precautions
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur :
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the smart key could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
a call, receiving calls, text messag-
ing, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the smart key
and your cell phone or smart phone
in the same pants or jacket pocket
and maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
✽✽NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
Features of your vehicle
204
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sun-
light, or it will be damaged.
OYP044005K
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
421
Features of your vehicle
Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you turn the engine start/stop
button to the ON position by pressing
the button while carrying the smart
key, it checks and determines and
verifies if the smart key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the but-
ton while carrying the smart key.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
✽✽NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
✽✽NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Features of your vehicle
224
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is oper-
ated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tail-
gate) and engine hood are closed
and latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmit-
ter of the keyless entry system (or
smart key) or ignition key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
(for smart key, the chime also
sounds) once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door (or tailgate) or engine
hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights and the chime will not
operate and the theft-alarm will not
arm. If all doors (and tailgate) and
engine hood are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warn-
ing lights blink once.
The system can also be armed by
locking the doors with the key from
the front doors; however, the hazard
warning lights will not blink using this
method.
✽✽NOTICE
The theft-alarm system can be deac-
tivated by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
423
Features of your vehicle
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s) leave
the vehicle. If any door (or tailgate)
or engine hood is opened within
30 seconds after the system
enters the armed stage, the sys-
tem is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened with-
out using the ignition key or trans-
mitter (or smart key).
• The tailgate is opened without
using the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds, and
repeat the horn 3 times unless the
system is disarmed. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the igni-
tion key or transmitter (or smart key).
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when
• The doors (and tailgate) are
unlocked with the transmitter (or
smart key) or the ignition key.
• Pull the power sliding door out han-
dle while the power door ON/OFF
button is ON (not depressed).
After depressing the unlock button,
the hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound twice (in
smart key) to indicate that the sys-
tem is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if
any door (or tailgate) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
Features of your vehicle
244
✽✽NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
- If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key
into the ignition switch, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position
and wait for 30 seconds. Then the
system will be disarmed.
- If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, press the engine
start/stop button with smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system are
not covered by your vehicle manu-
facturer warranty.
CAUTION - Adjusting
alarm system
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
425
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• Turn the key clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
• If you lock the driver’s door with a
key, all vehicle doors will lock auto-
matically.
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
to the right once to unlock the door
and once more within 4 seconds to
unlock all doors.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
✽✽NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
OYP044009K
Lock
Unlock
Lock
■ Type A ■ Type B
Unlock
Features of your vehicle
264
• Once the doors are unlocked, it
may be opened by pulling the door
handle and sliding the door
towards the rear of the vehicle. (for
manual sliding doors)
• Once the doors are unlocked, it
may be opened by pulling the door
handle once. And then the sliding
door will be opened. (for power
sliding doors)
• When the door is fully open, the
door will lock into an open position.
To close the door, pull out the door
handle (1) and sliding the door (2)
towards the front of vehicle. (for
manual sliding doors)
• When the door is fully open, the
door will lock into an open position.
To close the door, pull out the door
handle (1) once. And then the slid-
ing door will be closed. (for power
sliding doors)
OYP044172K
WARNING - Partially
opened sliding door
When opening the rear sliding
doors, make sure the doors are
fully opened and locked in posi-
tion. If the sliding doors are only
partially opened and not locked
in position, the rear sliding
doors may move unintentionally
causing injuries.
CAUTION
The left sliding door cannot be
opened when the fuel filler lid is
open. However, if the fuel filler
lid is opened after the door is
opened slightly, the left sliding
door can be slid rearward. Close
the left sliding door to prevent
possible damage to the door or
the fuel filler lid.
OYP044173K
427
Features of your vehicle
• To lock a door without the key, push
the inside door lock button (1) or cen-
tral door lock switch (2) to the “Lock”
position when the ignition switch is
OFF position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle
doors will lock automatically.
✽✽NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion.The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
OYP044010K
OYP044011K
Features of your vehicle
284
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward. (for front door)
• To open a door, pull the door handle
rearward (for sliding door)
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button will
unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit :
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate.
With central door lock switch
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the right portion (1)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
lock.
OYP044012K
Driver’s door
OYP044013K
Passenger’s door
429
Features of your vehicle
• When pressing the left portion (2)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or
if the smart key is in the vehicle)
and any front door is opened, the
doors will not lock even though the
front portion (1) of the central door
lock switch is pressed.
WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
WARNING - Unattended
children/animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle
CAUTION - Sliding door
hinge
When getting in and out of the
sliding door, do not step on the
sliding door hinge or drop or
put heavy objects on the hinge.
The door may not open or close
normally by damaging the door
hinge or wire part.
OYP044175K
Features of your vehicle
304
Impact sensing door unlock
system
In the event of air bag deployment
resulting from a vehicle impact, all
doors will automatically unlock.
Automatic door lock system
All doors will be automatically locked
if the automatic transaxle shift lever
is shifted from the P(Park) position to
the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D
(Drive) position.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located
on the front edge of the door to the
lock ( ) position. When the child
safety lock is in the lock position, the
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (1)
until the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
OYP044014K
WARNING - Rear door
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is motion, he can fall
out.
431
Features of your vehicle
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter
(or smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and then pulling the handle
up.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the
tailgate unlock button on the smart
key is pressed (if equipped). Once
the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate is locked auto-
matically.
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the tailgate.
✽✽NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
TAILGATE (for manual tailgate)
CAUTION - Tailgate lift
Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the tailgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the tailgate
is not closed prior to driving.
OYP044015N
Features of your vehicle
324
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure
that the tailgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the tailgate.
Power tailgate (if equipped)
Detailed information for the power
tailgate is described in the following
"Power sliding door and power tail-
gate" section.
OYP044016N
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
Driving with the tailgate open is
not advisable. Dangerous
exhaust fumes can enter the
passenger compartment and
harm vehicle occupants. If you
must drive with the tailgate
opened, keep the air vents and
all windows open so that addi-
tional outside air can enter.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available.
Occupants should always be
properly restrained.
433
Features of your vehicle
Emergency tailgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadver-
tently locked in the cargo area, the
tailgate can be opened by pushing
the release lever and pushing open
the tailgate.
OYP044320N
WARNING - Safety
release lever use
Unless there is an emergency
which requires otherwise, do
not use the release lever for the
liftgate (tailgete) while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Opening the
liftgate (tailgete) while the vehi-
cle is in motion can increase the
risk of an occupant falling out
of the vehicle and being seri-
ously injured.
Features of your vehicle
344
POWER SLIDING DOOR AND POWER TAILGATE (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Left power sliding door control
button
(2) Right power sliding door control
button
(3) Power tailgate control button*
(4) Power door ON/OFF button
*: if equipped
The power sliding doors and power
tailgate can be opened and closed
automatically with the folding key or
smart key, the main control buttons
on the overhead console or the sub
control buttons on the center pillar
trim and the tailgate.
When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is OFF (depressed), the power
sliding door and power tailgate can
be opened and closed manually by
pulling the door handles from inside
or outside vehicle.
✽✽NOTICE
If the power sliding door is open
approximately 6 hours, the ECU will
enter Sleep mode to conserve bat-
tery power and the door might not
close automatically. Close the door
or tailgate manually and then oper-
ate the door with the power operat-
ing system.
OYP044017K
OYP044018K
OYP044027N
On the center pillar trim
On the tailgate
On the overhead console WARNING - Unattended
children/pets
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power sliding door or
power tailgate that could result
in injury to themselves or oth-
ers or damage to the vehicle.
435
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power slid-
ing doors and tailgate may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
✽✽NOTICE
When the sliding doors are opened
manually (power OFF), more effort
will be required to open and close
than on non-power sliding doors.
✽✽NOTICE
• The power sliding door and power
tailgate can be operated when the
engine is not running. However
the power operation consumes
large amounts of vehicle electric
power. To prevent the battery
from being discharged, do not
operate them excessively.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the power
sliding door and power tailgate at
open position for a long lime.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle, do
not operate the power sliding door
or power tailgate. This could cause
the power sliding door or power tail-
gate to operate improperly.
CAUTION - Operating
sliding door/tailgate
Do not apply excessive force
while operating the power slid-
ing door or power liftgate (tail-
gate). This could cause damage
to the power sliding door or
power liftgate (tailgate).
Features of your vehicle
364
Automatic stop and reversal
If the power opening or closing is
blocked by an object or part of the
body, the power sliding door and power
tailgate will detect the resistance,
chime 3 times, and then either stop or
move to the full open position.
However, if the resistance is weak
such as an object that is thin or soft,
or the door is near latched position,
the automatic stop and reversal may
not detect the resistance and closing
operation will continue. Also, if the
power sliding door or power tailgate
is forced by strong impact, the auto-
matic stop and reversal may operate.
If the automatic stop and reversal
feature operates continuously more
than twice during one opening or
closing operation, the power sliding
door or power tailgate may stop at
that position. At this time, close the
doors manually and operate the door
automatically again.
How to reset the power sliding
door and power tailgate
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the related fuse has
been replaced or disconnected, and
the power sliding door or power tail-
gate doesn't work properly, the
power sliding door and power tail-
gate must be reset as follows:
OYP044041K
OYP044042K
OYP044020K
437
Features of your vehicle
For power sliding door
1. Put the shift lever in the P (Park).
2. Close the fuel filler lid.
3. Change the position of fuse switch
to OFF on the driver's side fuse
panel and change the position of
fuse switch to ON after 1 minute.
4. Close the sliding door manually.
5. Open the sliding door completely
using the transmitter or main control
button on the overhead console.
6. Close the sliding door completely
using the transmitter or main control
button on the overhead console.
For the left/right power sliding doors
and power tailgate, follow above
steps to reset.
If the power sliding door or power
tailgate doesn't work properly after
above procedure, have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
For power tailgate
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2. Press the tailgate handle switch
and tailgate close button at the
same time for more than 3 sec-
onds. (the chime will sound).
3. Close the tailgate manually.
4. Open the tailgate using the tail-
gate handle switch and allow it to
fully open.
5. After fully opening, the tailgate will
complete initialization and lights
will flash twice indicating reset
complete.
If the power tailgate does not work
properly after the above procedure,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Power door ON/OFF button
• When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is ON (not depressed), the
power sliding door and power tail-
gate can be controlled with the sub
control buttons on the center pillar
trim or tailgate. Also, the doors can
be opened and closed automatical-
ly by pulling the inside or outside
door handles.
OYP044021K
Features of your vehicle
384
• When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is OFF (depressed), the power
sliding door and power tailgate can
not be controlled with the sub con-
trol buttons or door handles.
Also, the doors can be opened and
closed manually by pulling the
inside or outside door handles.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not allow children to play with
the power sliding door or power tail-
gate. Keep the power door ON/OFF
button in the OFF (depressed) posi-
tion when not in use.
✽✽NOTICE
Close the sliding door and tailgate,
and keep the power door ON/OFF
button in the OFF (depressed) posi-
tion before washing the vehicle in an
automatic car wash.
✽✽NOTICE
When the sliding doors and power
tailgate are opened manually (power
OFF), more effort will be required to
open and close than on non-power
sliding doors and non- power tailgate.
Power sliding door operation
• Push the corresponding main con-
trol button on the overhead con-
sole to open or close the power
sliding door.
However, the power sliding door
will not open with the main control
button when all power sliding doors
and power taligate are locked and
closed.
OYP044022K
439
Features of your vehicle
• When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is ON (not depressed), do as
follows to open or close the power
sliding doors :
- Push the corresponding sub con-
trol button on the center pillar trim.
- Pull the door handle from inside
or outside vehicle.
- If the sub control button is pushed
while the door is locked or child
safety lock is engaged, the chime
sounds once, and the power slid-
ing door will not open.
- If the door handle is pulled from
inside or outside while the door is
locked or child safety lock is
engaged, the power sliding door
will not open. However, the power
sliding door can be opened by
pulling the outside door handle
while the door is unlocked and
child safety lock is engaged.
• When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is OFF (depressed), the power
sliding door can not be controlled
with the sub control buttons or door
handles, and if the sub control but-
ton is pushed, chime sounds once.
However, the doors can be opened
and closed manually by pulling the
door handles from inside or out-
side vehicle.
• On a steep grade, the power slid-
ing door will slide faster when clos-
ing. And the drive unit motor may
operate additionally for a moment
after the door is closed. This is a
normal operation to ensure door
closing, not a malfunction.
OYP044023K
WARNING - Rear door
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is motion, he can fall out.
Features of your vehicle
404
When the rear passenger operates
the power sliding door, make sure
there are no people or objects
around the door, and have all occu-
pants get in or out of the vehicle after
the door is open fully and stopped.
Let the rear passengers get in or out
of the vehicle after the door is open
fully. Sudden closing could cause a
serious injury.
Close the door by pulling the door
handle after the door is open fully. Do
not pull the door handle while rear
passengers are getting in or out. The
door could suddenly close by itself
and cause a serious injury.
It takes about 5 seconds for the
power sliding door to close and latch
completely.
• The left power sliding door cannot
be opened while the fuel filler lid is
open fully. If the main or sub control
button is pushed, the chime
sounds once. Also, if the fuel filler
lid open button is pushed while the
left power sliding door is opening,
the chime sounds 3 times.
✽✽NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid is opened when
the left sliding door is not closed
completely, the door may be opened.
Close the left sliding door before
refueling to prevent possible dam-
age to the door or the fuel filler lid.
WARNING - Power sliding
door
Do not begin to accelerate
before the door closes and
latches completely. If the door
is not completely closed while
the vehicle is moving, the door
can open and passengers can
fall out of the vehicle.
441
Features of your vehicle
• If the power sliding door is not
closed and latched completely
after power closing operation, the
chime sounds 3 times. Open and
close the door again.
• If the power sliding door is operat-
ed while the door is in partially
opened position (less than 300
mm/12 in.), the door is automati-
cally opened fully.
• If the power sliding door is operat-
ed while the door is in half-opened
position (more than 300 mm/12
in.), the door is automatically
closed completely.
• If the power sliding door is operated
again while the door is closing, the
door is automatically opened fully.
• If the power sliding door is operated
again while the door is opening, the
door is automatically closed com-
pletely. However, If the power slid-
ing door is operated again when
the door is in partially opened posi-
tion (less than 300 mm/12 in.), the
door is opened continuously.
• The half-opened power sliding door
is automatically opened or closed
fully by pushing the door forward or
backward without pulling the door
handle while the power door
ON/OFF button is in ON (not
depressed). However, when the
door is in partially opened position
(less than 300 mm/12 in.), the door
is not closed automatically.
Power sliding door non-opening
conditions
The power sliding door is not auto-
matically opened, but closed under
the following conditions. If the main
or sub control button is pushed for
power opening operation, the chime
sounds once.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position,
1. Vehicle is moving above 5 km/h (3
mph).
2. The gearshift lever is not in P
(Park) for automatic transaxle.
Features of your vehicle
424
Power tailgate operation
(if equipped)
• Push the power tailgate main con-
trol button on the overhead con-
sole to open or close the power
tailgate. However, the power tail-
gate will not open with the main
control button when all power slid-
ing doors and power tailgate are
locked and closed. But the power
tailgate will be opened with the
folding key (or smart key).
• When the power tailgate is operated
with the main or sub control button
or transmitter, the chime sounds and
hazard warning lights flash 2 times.
• When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is ON (not depressed), do as
follows to open or close the power
tailgate:
- Pushing the sub control button on
the bottom of the tailgate will close
the power tailgate automatically.
- Pressing and pulling up the tail-
gate handle slightly will open the
power tailgate automatically
when the tailgate is unlocked.
• When the power door ON/OFF but-
ton is OFF (depressed), the power
tailgate can not be controlled with the
sub control buttons or tailgate handle.
However, the tailgate may be
opened manually by pulling the
exterior handle and lifting the tail-
gate upward. The tailgate may be
manually closed by pushing the
tailgate downward.
• Do not drive the vehicle until the
power tailgate completely closed.
The power tailgate may not close
completely if the vehicle is started
during automatic closing.
✽✽NOTICE
The button on the tailgate will not
illuminated and operated when the
power door On/OFF button is OFF
(depressed).
OYP044026K
OYP044027N
443
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
If the power tailgate does not oper-
ate normally, first check the follow-
ing condition before using the power
tailgate.
• Make sure the shift lever is in
Park
• Make sure the Power Tailgate Off
switch is not pressed.
If any of the power tailgate buttons
are pressed while the power tailgate
is in operation, the power tailgate
will stop. If any button is pressed
again the power tailgate will reverse
direction.
• Even though the Power door
ON/OFF button is in the OFF
(depressed) position, if the tailgate
is manually closed to the secondary
latch position, the tailgate will be
electrically moved to the fully
latched position. Make sure that
face, arms, hands, and other
obstructions are safely out of the
way before operating the tailgate.
• The chime will sound and the haz-
ard warning flasher will blink 10
times if you drive with the tailgate
closed but not fully secured. Stop
your vehicle immediately at a safe
place to check if your tailgate is
securely locked.
• Make sure there are no people or
objects around the tailgate before
operating the power tailgate. Wait
until the tailgate is open fully and
stopped before loading or unload-
ing cargo or passengers from the
vehicle.
• Make sure the tailgate is closed
firmly before driving. If the tailgate
is open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury or
death to vehicle occupants.
• If the power tailgate is not closed
and latched completely after power
closing operation, the chime will
sound and hazard warning lights
will blink 10 times. Stop the driving
immediately and close the tailgate
securely at the safe place.
• If the power tailgate is operated while
the tailgate is in the partially opened
position (more than 9degrees), the
tailgate will stop the operation. If you
operate the power tailgate again, the
power tailgate will be operate in the
opposite direction.
Features of your vehicle
444
• If the power tailgate is operated
while the tailgate is in the partially
closed position (less than degrees),
the tailgate will open fully.
• If the power tailgate is operated while
the tailgate is in the partially opened
position (less than 9degrees), the
tailgate will stop at approximately
9degree open position.
Power tailgate non-opening
conditions
The power tailgate will not open
automatically, but will close under the
following conditions.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position,
1. Vehicle is moving above 3 km/h (2
mph).
2. The gearshift lever is not in P
(Park) for automatic transaxle.
The chime will sound continuously if
you drive over 3 km/h (2 mph) with
the tailgate opened. Stop your vehi-
cle at a safe place as soon as possi-
ble to check if your tailgate is
opened.
Power tailgate opening height
user setting
The driver may set the height of a
fully opened tailgate by following the
below instruction.
1. Confirm the position of the power
door ON/OFF button is ON (not
depressed).
2. Position the tailgate manually or
via automatic operation to the
height you prefer.
OYP044027N
445
Features of your vehicle
3. Press the tailgate close button for
more than 3 seconds.
4.You will hear the system beep
twice indicating height has been
set up.
The tailgate will open to the height
the driver has set up.
Emergency tailgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadver-
tently locked in the cargo area, the
tailgate can be opened by pushing
the release lever and pushing open
the tailgate.
WARNING
Make sure that there are no peo-
ple or objects in the path of the
power tailgate (or smart tail-
gate) prior to use. Serious
injury, damage to the vehicle or
damage to surrounding objects
may result if contact with the
power tailgate (or smart tail-
gate) occurs.
OYP044247N
OYP044320N
Features of your vehicle
464
Smart Tailgate (if equipped)
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the tailgate can be opened using
the Smart Tailgate system.
If the power door ON/OFF button is
in the OFF (depressed) position, the
smart tailgate will not operate.
How to use the Smart Tailgate
The tailgate can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
✽✽NOTICE
• The Smart Tailgate does not oper-
ate when :
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is contin-
uously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and within
1.5 m (60 inches) from the front
door handles. (for vehicles
equipped with Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
OYP044028K
447
Features of your vehicle
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Tailgate, go to
User Settings Mode and select
Smart Tailgate on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (50 ~100 cm (20~40 inches)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound for about
3 seconds to alert you the smart key
has been detected and the tailgate
will open.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area
if you do not want the tailgate to
open. If you have unintentionally
entered the detecting area and the
hazard warning lights and chime
starts to operate, leave the detecting
area with the smart key. The tailgate
will stay closed.
OYP044029N
Features of your vehicle
484
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the tailgate will open.
Make sure you close the tailgate
before driving your vehicle.
Make sure there are no people or
objects around the tailgate before
opening or closing the tailgate.
Make sure objects in the tailgate do not
come out when opening the tailgate on
a slope. It may cause serious injury.
Make sure to deactivate the Smart
Tailgate when washing your vehicle.
Otherwise, the tailgate may open
inadvertently.
The key should be kept out of reach of
children. Children may inadvertently
open the Smart Tailgate while playing
around the rear area of the vehicle.
OYP044030K
CAUTION - Tailgate lift
Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the tailgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the tailgate
is not closed prior to driving.
449
Features of your vehicle
How to deactivate the Smart Tailgate
function using the smart key
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Tailgate open
4. Panic
5. Right side power sliding door open
/ close
6. Left side power sliding door open /
close
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Tailgate function
will be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Tailgate func-
tion for emergency situations.
✽✽NOTICE
• If you press the door unlock but-
ton (2), the Smart Tailgate func-
tion will be deactivated temporar-
ily. But, if you do not open any
door for 30 seconds, the smart tail-
gate function will be activated
again.
• If you press the tailgate open but-
ton (3) for more than 1 second, the
tailgate opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or tailgate open button (3)
when the Smart Tailgate function
is not in the Detect and Alert stage,
the smart tailgate function will not
be deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Tailgate function by press-
ing the smart key button and
opened a door, the smart tailgate
function can be activated again by
closing and locking all doors.
OYP044078K
Features of your vehicle
504
Detecting area
• The Smart Tailgate operates with a
welcome alert if the smart key is
detected within 50~100 cm (20~40
inches) from the tailgate.
• The alert stops at once if the smart
key is positioned outside the
detecting area during the Detect
and Alert stage.
✽✽NOTICE
• The Smart Tailgate function will not
work if any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is parked on a slope
or unpaved road, etc.
OYP044031N
451
Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down* (Driver's and
Passenger's window)
(7) Power window and rear sunroof*
lock switch
* if equipped
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OYP044032K
Features of your vehicle
524
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's win-
dow. The driver has a power window
lock button which can block the oper-
ation of passenger windows. The
power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
However, if the front doors are
opened, the power windows cannot
be operated even within the 30 sec-
ond period.
✽✽NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
OYP044035K
453
Features of your vehicle
Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
driver’s window even when the
switch is released. To stop the win-
dow at the desired position while the
window is in operation, momentarily
pull the switch in the direction oppo-
site of the window’s movement.
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers
or raises the window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window
at the desired position while the win-
dow is in operation, pull up or press
down and release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver's and passenger's
window and continue pulling up
the driver’s power window switch
for at least 1 second after the win-
dow is completely closed.
OYP044034K OYP044033K
Features of your vehicle
544
Automatic reversal
(for Auto up/down window)
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
The distance may vary based on the
size or position of the window. If the
window detects the resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower
approximately 2.5 cm. (1 in).
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
Always check for obstructions before
raising any window to avoid injuries
or vehicle damage. If an object less
than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter is
caught between the window glass
and the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may not
detect the resistance and will not
stop and reverse direction.
Power window and rear sunroof*
lock button
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on a rear passen-
ger door and the rear sunroof switch
on a rear passenger room lamp by
depressing the power window and
rear sunroof lock switch on the dri-
ver’s door to LOCK (pressed).
* : if equipped
OUN026013
OYP044036K
455
Features of your vehicle
When the power window and rear
sunroof lock switch is pressed :
• The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger's control
can operate the front passen-
ger's power window.
• The rear passenger's control
cannot operate the rear passen-
ger's power window.
• The rear sunroof control cannot
operate the rear sunroof. But
The front master sunroof control
can operate both front and rear
sunroofs (if equipped).
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
CAUTION - Opening/clos-
ing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
WARNING - Power win-
dows
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the power window lock switch
(on the driver's door) in the
LOCK (pressed) position.
Features of your vehicle
564
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position
and setting the parking brake.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull up the sec-
ondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Pull out the support rod.
4. Hold the hood opened with the
support rod.
✽✽NOTICE - Hot parts
Grab the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The plastic will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is hot.
HOOD
OYP044037K
OYP044038K OYP044039K
457
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine com-
partment must be correctly
installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30
cm (1 ft.) above the closed posi-
tion and let it drop. Make sure that
it locks into place.
The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole whenever
you inspect the engine compartment.
This will prevent the hood from falling
and possibly injuring you.
WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING - Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, causing a total loss of visi-
bility, which might result in an
accident.
Features of your vehicle
584
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
the fuel filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener button.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks” once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
✽✽NOTICE
There may be an intermittent noise
near the refueling hole while the
engine is idling if the fuel cap is not
closed securely. This occurs normal-
ly with the OBD system.
✽✽NOTICE
When refueling fully at an up hill,
the fuel gauge may not point to the F
position.
It is not a malfunction. If you move
your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel
gauge will move to the full position.
FUEL FILLER LID
OYP044044K
OYP044043K
459
Features of your vehicle
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
✽✽NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks once,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator light will illuminate
WARNING - Fire/explo-
sion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facili-
ty. Failure to follow all warnings
will result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
WARNING - Static
electricity
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or
fabric (polyester, satin, nylon,
etc.) capable of producing stat-
ic electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors resulting in rapid burn-
ing. If you must reenter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle, away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source.
WARNING - Refueling
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap. If
pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
Features of your vehicle
604
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current
and/or electronic interference
from cellular phones can poten-
tially ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
WARNING - Refueling &
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact with the
vehicle should be maintained
until the filling is complete. Use
only approved portable plastic
fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
461
Features of your vehicle
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the “Fuel requirements”
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replace-
ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehi-
cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control sys-
tem.
Emergency fuel filler lid release
If the fuel filler lid does not open
using the remote fuel filler lid
release, you can open it manually by
pulling the handle outward slightly.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
OYP044165K
Features of your vehicle
624
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
However, if the front door is opened,
the sunroof cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions. After the vehicle is
washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to
wipe off any water that is on the sun-
roof before operating it.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - Sunroof
control lever
Do not continue to press the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
To prevent damage to the sun-
roof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
OYP044046K
OYP044047K
■Front
■ Rear
463
Features of your vehicle
Sliding the sunroof
To open the sunroof, pull the sunroof
control lever backward.
To close the sunroof, push the sun-
roof control lever forward.
To open the sunroof automatically :
Pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the second detent position
and then release it.
The sunroof will open as below :
- Front sunroof : sunroof will slide all
the way open.
- Rear sunroof : sunroof will not
open fully.
To open the sun roof fully, pull the
sunroof control lever again.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OYP044048K
WARNING - Roof cargo
Do not operate the sun roof
while using the roof rack to
transport cargo.This may cause
the cargo to come loose and
distract the driver.
■ Rear
■Front
Features of your vehicle
644
To close the sunroof automatically :
Pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the second detent position
and then release it. The sunroof will
slide all the way open.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
While driving with the sunroof in an
open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and
can be reduced or eliminated by tak-
ing the following actions. If you expe-
rience the noise with the sunroof
open, slightly reduce the size of the
sunroof opening.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse direction,
and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
(for front sunroof)
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward until the sunroof
moves to the desired position.
To close the sunroof, push the sun-
roof lever forward or pull downward
until the sunroof moves to the
desired position.
OBK049018
OYP044049K
465
Features of your vehicle
Do not extend the face, neck, arms or
body outside the sunroof while driving.
Care should be taken that no objects
stick out through the sunroof. In a
sudden stop, pertinent parts may be
damaged.
With the sunroof open for an extended
period of time, dirt may accumulate on
the guide rails causing noise during
opening and closing. Periodically
remove dirt using a clean cloth.
Sunshade
When opening the sunroof, the sun-
shade will also open. Once the sun-
roof is closed, the sunshade can be
manually closed.
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3. Release the sunroof control lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close
(about 10~15 seconds) until the
sunroof moves a little. Then,
release the lever.
OBK049019
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
Features of your vehicle
664
5. Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
The sunroof glass slide open →
The sunroof glass slide close
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset.
✽✽NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
Rear sunroof lock
When the power window lock switch
is pressed, the rear sunroof control
cannot operate the rear sunroof. But
The front master sunroof control can
operate both front and rear sunroofs
(if equipped).
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key : turns off the engine)
when the sunroof is not fully closed,
the warning chime will sound for a
few seconds and a message will
appear on the LCD display or warn-
ing indicator will illuminate.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
OYP044155K
■for B, C type cluster
467
Features of your vehicle
Power steering (if equipped)
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the
vehicle. If the engine is off or if the
power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
If the power steering drive belt
breaks or if the power steering pump
malfunctions, the steering effort will
greatly increase.
✽✽NOTICE
• If the vehicle is parked for extend-
ed periods outside in cold weather
(below -10°C/14°F), the power
steering may require increased
effort when the engine is first
started. This is caused by
increased fluid viscosity due to the
cold weather and does not indicate
a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the
engine RPM by depressing the
accelerator until the RPM reaches
1,500 rpm then release or let the
engine idle for two or three min-
utes to warm up the fluid.
Electric power steering
(if equipped)
Power steering uses the motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steer-
ing system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by the power steering con-
trol unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier
as the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for better control of
the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
STEERING WHEEL
CAUTION - Power
steering pump
Never hold the steering wheel to
the extreme right or left for more
than 5 seconds with the engine
running. Holding the steering
wheel for more than 5 seconds in
either position may cause dam-
age to the power steering pump.
Features of your vehicle
684
✽✽NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation :
• The steering effort is high immedi-
ately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the sys-
tem performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
is completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continu-
ously when the vehicle is not in
motion. However, after a few min-
utes, it will return to its normal
conditions.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor-
mal noise could occur. If tempera-
ture rises, the noise will disappear.
This is a normal condition.
If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warn-
ing light will illuminate on the instru-
ment cluster.The steering wheel may
become difficult to control or operate
abnormally. Take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Tilt and telescopic steering
Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive.You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
WARNING
Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving.
You may lose steering control
and cause severe personal
injury, death or accidents.
469
Features of your vehicle
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock-release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3) then
pull up the lock-release lever (4) to
lock the steering wheel in place. Be
sure to adjust the steering wheel to
the desired position before driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steer-
ing wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate and notify you on the
LCD display. (if equipped)
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off
and notify you on the LCD display. (if
equipped)
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
If you turn off the engine within 30
minutes while the heated steering
wheel is ON, the heated steering
wheel will turn on automatically
when you set the ignition switch in
the ON position.
OYP044051K
CAUTION
Do not install any grip or acces-
sory to operate the steering
wheel. This causes damage to
the heated steering wheel sys-
tem.
OYP044050K
Features of your vehicle
704
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbols on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
OYP044052K
471
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision through the rear win-
dow.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Electrochromic mirror with
HomeLink system (if equipped)
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the I button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the O button (2) to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mir-
ror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and don’t install a wide mirror. It
could result in injury, during an
accident or deployment of the
air bag.
OAM049023
Day
Night
OHD046025N
Features of your vehicle
724
HomeLink®Wireless Control System
Your new mirror comes with an inte-
grated HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, which allows you to pro-
gram the mirror to activate your
garage door(s), estate gate, home
lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various
existing transmitters.
Retain the original transmitter for
future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also sug-
gested that upon the sale of the vehi-
cle, the programmed HomeLink but-
tons be erased for security purposes
(follow step 1 in the “Programming”
portion of this text).
Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC posi-
tion for programming and/or opera-
tion of HomeLink. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be
replaced in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and
accurate transmission of the radio-
frequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror:
1. When programming the buttons for
the first time, press and hold the
left and center buttons ( ,)
simultaneously until the indicator
light begins to flash after approxi-
mately 20 seconds. (This proce-
dure erases the factory-set default
codes. Do not perform this step
when programming the additional
HomeLink buttons.)
OHD046305N
Glare detection sensor
Indicator light
Homelink buttons OHD046306N
Flashing
473
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
For non rolling code garage door
openers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door open-
ers, follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming, please
follow the Canadian Programming
section.
For help with determining whether
your garage door opener is non-
rolling code or rolling code, please
refer to the garage door openers
owner’s manual or contact
HomeLink customer service at 1-
800-355-3515.
2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to
train and the button on the trans-
mitter while the transmitter is
approximately 2-8 cm (1 to 3 inch-
es) away from the mirror. Do not
release the buttons until step 3
has been completed.
3. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapid flashing light
indicates successful programming
of the new frequency signal.)
✽✽NOTICE
Some gate and garage door openers
may require you to replace step #3
with the “cycling” procedure noted
in the “Canadian Programming”
section of this document.
OHD046307N
Flashing
1-3inches
Transmitter
Features of your vehicle
744
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped devices) with the
rolling code feature, follow these
instructions after completing the
“Programming” portion of this text. (A
second person may make the following
training procedures quicker & easier.)
4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” but-
ton on the device’s motor head
unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by product
brand. If there is difficulty locating
the “learn” or “smart” button, refer-
ence the device’s owner’s manual
or contact HomeLink at 1-800-
355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button on the device’s
motor head unit. You have 30 sec-
onds to complete step number 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink button up to
three times. The rolling code
equipped device should now rec-
ognize the HomeLink signal and
activate when the HomeLink but-
ton is pressed. The remaining two
buttons may now be programmed
if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the “Programming”
portion of this text.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the pro-
grammed HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, securi-
ty system, entry door lock, estate
gate, or home or office lighting). For
convenience, the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device may also be used
at any time. The HomeLink Wireless
Controls System (once programmed)
or the original hand-held transmitter
may be used to activate the device
(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
475
Features of your vehicle
Erasing programmed HomeLink
buttons
To erase the three programmed but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be
erased) :
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaneously, until the
indicator light begins to flash
(approximately 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink
using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the hand-held transmitter
2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from
the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button (or press and
“cycle” - as described in “Canadian
Programming”).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The previous device has now been
erased and the new device can be
activated by pushing the HomeLink
button that has just been pro-
grammed. This procedure will not
affect any other programmed
HomeLink buttons.
OHD046306N
Flashing
Features of your vehicle
764
Canadian Programming
Garage & gate openers
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the HomeLink button (note steps
2 through 4 in the “Programming” por-
tion of this text) while you press and
re-press (“cycle”) your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until
the frequency signal has been
learned. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds upon successful training.
Accessories
If you would like additional informa-
tion on the HomeLink Wireless
Control System, HomeLink compati-
ble products, or to purchase other
accessories such as the HomeLink®
Lighting Package, please contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
FCC ID : NZLZTVHL3
IC : 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to
operate the device.
477
Features of your vehicle
Conversation mirror
The mirror is a convenient feature to
help the front passenger talk with
rear passengers without turning the
head or body rearward.
To use the mirror, push the cover and
open it.
Close the cover after use.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be fold-
ed back to prevent damage during an
automatic vehicle wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
OYP044055K
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict the movement of the mir-
ror, do not force the mirror for
adjustment.To remove ice, use a
deicer spray, or a sponge or soft
cloth with very warm water.
Features of your vehicle
784
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use an
approved spray de-icer (not radiator
antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Adjusting outside rearview mirror
Adjusting the rearview mirrors :
Press either the L (driver’s side) or R
(passenger’s side) button (1) to
select the rearview mirror you would
like to adjust when the ignition switch
is ACC or ON position.
Use the mirror adjustment control (2)
to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After adjustment, press the L or R
button (1) again to prevent inadver-
tent adjustment.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
OYP044057K
479
Features of your vehicle
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
While the vehicle is moving rear-
ward, the outside rearview mirror(s)
will move downward to aid reverse
parking. According to the position of
the outside rearview mirror switch
(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will
operate as follows:
L/R : When the remote control outside
rearview mirror switch is select-
ed to the L (left) or R (right) posi-
tion, both outside rearview mir-
rors will move downward.
Neutral : When neither switch is
selected, the outside
rearview mirrors will not
operate.
The outside rearview mirrors will auto-
matically revert to their original posi-
tions under the following conditions :
1. The ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
2. Shift lever is moved to any position
except R (Reverse).
3. Remote control outside rearview
mirror switch is placed in the mid-
dle.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch when the ignition switch is
ACC or ON position as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
OYP044177K
OYP044058K
Features of your vehicle
804
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold auto-
matically as follows :
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the folding key or smart key.
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by the
button on the outside door handle.
• The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession. Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
OYP044269N
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the engine start/stopo
button is in the OFF position.
However, to prevent unneces-
sary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than
necessary while the engine is
not running.
In case it is an electric type out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
481
Features of your vehicle
Blind zone mirror (if equipped)
The Blind Zone Mirror (BZM) is a
supplemental mirror that reduces the
driver’s blind zone by showing the
rear side area of the vehicle. The
blind zone mirror is equipped on the
left-hand outside rearview mirror.
CAUTION
Do not clean the mirror with
harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum based cleaning prod-
ucts.
OYP044267N
OYP044268N
WARNING
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unexpect-
ed situations even though the
vehicle is equipped with a blind
zone mirror.
• The blind zone mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mirror
but always pay attention to traf-
fic around you.
Features of your vehicle
824
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights
OYP044308C/OYP044101C/OYP044100C
■■Type A
❈The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
■■Type B
■■Type C
483
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
pressing the illumination control button
("+" or "-") when the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the
tale lights are turned on. • If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
[Type A]
(1) ▲ /▼: TRIP scroll switch for
changing trip modes
(2) RESET : RESET button for
resetting items
OYP044059K
OYP044300N
OYP044157N
■Type A
■ Type B, C
OYP044060N
■Type A
Features of your vehicle
844
[Type B, C]
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) ▲ /▼/ OK : SELECT scroll
switch for setting the
selected item and
RESET scroll switch
for resetting items
(3) : RETURN button for move
the previous mode or item (if
equipped)
❈For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
OYP044060K
■Type B, C
OYP044102C
OYP044103N
485
Features of your vehicle
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the “H”
position, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to “If the Engine
Overheats” in chapter 6.
CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
WARNING - Hot radiator
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could severely burn. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OYP044105K
■Type A, B ■Type C
Features of your vehicle
864
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽✽NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
✽✽NOTICE
Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.
OYP044106K
■Type A, B ■Type C WARNING - Fuel gauge
Stop and obtain additional fuel
as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when
the gauge indicator comes
close to the E level. Running out
of fuel can expose vehicle occu-
pants to danger.
CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
487
Features of your vehicle
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 kilo-
meters or miles.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C
(-40°F ~ 140°F)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
To change the temperature unit (from
°C to °F or from °F to °C)
• Type A Cluster
Change the trip mode to RANGE
mode with TRIP scroll switch and
then press the RESET button more
than 5 seconds
• Type B, C Cluster
The temperature unit can be
changed by using the "User
Settings" mode of the LCD display.
❈For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OYP044301C
■Type A ■Type B
OYP044313C
■Type A ■Type B
Features of your vehicle
884
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
OYP044303N
■Type A ■Type B
489
Features of your vehicle
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
❈For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
LCD Modes (for type B/C cluster)
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Tur n By Turn
(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the navigation.
SCC/LDWS
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control system (SCC) and
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to "Smart Cruise Control system (SCC)" or
"Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter 5.
A/V
(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days).
This mode informs of warning messages related to washer fluid or malfunction of
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) and so on.
When the any door is not closed securely, this symbol illuminated. (for Type C cluster)
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps and so on.
Features of your vehicle
904
Service Mode
Service Interval
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time reach-
es 1,500 km. (900 mi) or 30 days.
- For type A cluster
Service symbol ( ) will blink and the
chime will sound for several seconds
each time you set the ignition switch
or Engine Start/Stop Button to the
ON position.
- For Type B and C cluster
Service interval message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval.
OYP044304C
OYP044314C
■Type A
■Type B, C
OYP044305C
OYP044119C
■Type A
■Type B, C
491
Features of your vehicle
- For type A cluster
Service symbol ( ) will blink and the
chime will sound for several seconds
each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
- For Type B and C cluster
“Service required” message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted
before:
- For Type A cluster
Consult your authorized Kia dealer.
- For Type B and C cluster
Press the RESET button (OK) for
more than 1 second.
Service interval OFF
If the service interval is not set
- For type A cluster
Service symbol ( ) will not blink and
the chime will not sound each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
If you want to activate Service inter-
val function, consult your authorized
Kia dealer.
- For Type B and C cluster
"Service interval OFF” message is
displayed on the LCD display.
If you want to activate Service inter-
val function, set the service interval
in the User setting mode.
For more details, refer to “User set-
ting mode" in this chapter.
✽✽NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OYP044122N
■Type B, C
Features of your vehicle
924
Master Warning Mode
• This warning light informs the driv-
er the following situations
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Lane Departure warning system
(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Forward collision warning system
(FCWS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Smart cruise control system
(SCC) malfunction (if equipped)
- Service reminder (if equipped)
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
(ex : refill the washer fluid)
User Settings Mode
(for type B/C cluster)
Description
On this mode, you can change set-
ting of the doors, lights, and so on.
Driving Assist
Smart Cruise Control Response
(if equipped)
Choose the sensitivity of the smart
cruise control.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if equipped)
If this item is checked, rear cross
traffic alert function will be activated.
Forward Collision Warning
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, forward collision
warning function will be activated.
OYP044161N
493
Features of your vehicle
Door / Tailgate
Automatically unlock
• Disable :
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
• On Key out :
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• On shift to P :
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
Two Press Unlock
• Off :
The two press unlock function will
be deactivated.Therefore, all doors
will unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On :
The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds,
all doors will unlock.
Horn Feedback
• Off :
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
• On :
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
Smart tailgate (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the smart tail-
gate function will be activated.
Features of your vehicle
944
Lights
One touch turn signal
If this item is checked, the lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay function will be activated.
Welcome Light (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
light function of the pocket lamp will
be activated.
Sound
Park assist system vol. (if equipped)
Adjust the Park Assist System vol-
ume. (Level 1~3).
Blind spot detection Sound (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the blind spot
detection sound function will be acti-
vated.
Welcome sound(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
Seat / Steering
Seat easy access (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the driver’s
seat will automatically move forward
or rearward for the driver to enter or
exit the vehicle comfortably.
Steering Position
If this item is checked, the warning
function regarding the steering wheel
alignment will be activated.
495
Features of your vehicle
Service interval
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
• Off : The service interval function
will be deactivated.
• On : You can set the service inter-
val (mileage and months).
Other features
Fuel economy auto reset
• Off :
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refuel-
ing.
• On (Auto Reset) :
The average fuel economy will reset
automatically when refueling.
For more details, refer to “Trip A/B" in
this chapter.
Auto rear wiper (reverse)
If this item is checked, the rear wiper
will automatically activated when the
front wiper is in ON position and shift
lever is in R (reverse) position.
Fuel Economy Unit
Choose the fuel economy unit. (US
gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
Language
Choose the language you prefer
within the LCD.
Features of your vehicle
964
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
SCC/LDWS Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS).
For more information, refer to "Smart
Cruise Control (SCC)" and "Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)"
in chapter 5.
A/V Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
OYP044274C OYP054110N OYP044273N
497
Features of your vehicle
Warning Messages
(for Type B and C cluaster)
Shift to P position
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press start button while turn
steering (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while turn-
ing the steering wheel right and left.
OYP044131N
OYP044125N OYP044271N
Features of your vehicle
984
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
OYP044133N OYP044121N OYP044123N
499
Features of your vehicle
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Press start button with key
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check fuse BRAKE SWITCH
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
OYP044127N OYP044129N OYP044137N
Features of your vehicle
1004
Shift to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽✽NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Door / Hood / Tailgate
• It means that any door, hood, or
tailgate is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine and then
open the driver's door when the
sunroof is open.
OYP044145N
OYP044153K OYP044155K
4101
Features of your vehicle
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
Turn on FUSE SWITCH
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
OYP044141N OYP044139N
■Type A
OYP044315N
OYP044135N
■ Type B, C
Features of your vehicle
1024
Low Fuel
This warning message illuminates if
the fuel tank is nearly empty.
- When the low fuel level warning
light is illuminates.
- When the trip computer displays
"--- km (or mile)" as range.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Check high beam assist system
(if equipped)
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb or circuit malfunction) with the
headlamp. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
OYP044276N
OYP044180N
4103
Features of your vehicle
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽✽NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes (for Type A cluster) Trip Modes
(for Type B and C cluster)
TRIP COMPUTER
Tripmeter A
Tripmeter B
Range
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
Service interval
Digital speedometer
To change the trip mode, scroll the
TRIP scroll switch (▲/▼).
To change the trip mode, scroll the
TRIP scroll switch (▲/▼/OK) in the
trip computer mode.
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Features of your vehicle
1044
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range : 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km
or mi.
To reset the tripmeter,
- Type A cluster
Press the RESET button
- Type B and C cluster
Press the SELECT scroll switch (OK)
on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the tripmeter
is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range : 0 ~ 999 km/h or
MPH
To reset the average vehicle speed,
- Type A cluster
Press the RESET button
- Type B and C cluster
Press the SELECT scroll switch (OK)
on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
✽✽NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
■Type A
OYP044306C
OYP044147C
■ Type B, C
4105
Features of your vehicle
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm) : 00:00 ~
99:59
To reset elapsed time,
- Type A cluster
Press the RESET button
- Type B and C cluster
Press the SELECT scroll switch (OK)
on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the elapsed
time is displayed.
✽✽NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
Fuel Economy
Range (1)
• The range is the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 1 ~ 9,999 km. or
1 ~ 9,999 mi
• If the estimated distance is below
1km (1mi.), the trip computer will
display “---” as range.
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the range function may
not operate correctly.
• The range may differ from the actu-
al driving distance as it is an esti-
mate of the available driving dis-
tance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and con-
dition of the vehicle.
■Type A
OYP044307C
OYP044117C
■ Type B, C
Features of your vehicle
1064
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range : 0.0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To reset average fuel economy manu-
ally,
- Type A cluster
Press the RESET button
- Type B and C cluster
Press the SELECT scroll switch (OK)
on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average
fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
✽✽NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03
miles) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range : 0 ~ 30
L/100km or 0 ~ 50 MPG
4107
Features of your vehicle
Digital speedometer
This mode displays the current
speed of the vehicle.
One time driving information
mode
This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1km (1mi.), the range (3) will display
as "---" and a refuel message will
appear (4).
OYP044192K
■ Type B, C
OYP044193C
■ Type B, C
Features of your vehicle
1084
Warning lights
✽✽NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
4109
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds.
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Features of your vehicle
1104
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving :
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Parking Brake
& Brake Fluid Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4111
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
1124
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates :
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
CAUTION - Catalytic con-
verter
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
tial catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
4113
Features of your vehicle
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system :
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low :
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION - Engine
damage
If the engine is not stopped
immediately after the engine oil
pressure warning light is illumi-
nated and stays on while the
engine is running, serious
engine damage may result.
Features of your vehicle
1144
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates :
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty :
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Door Ajar Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
When a door is not closed securely.
Tailgate Open Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
When the tailgate is not closed
securely.
Sunroof Open Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
When the sunroof is not closed
securely.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0 or E” can cause
the engine to misfire and dam-
age the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
4115
Features of your vehicle
Master Warning light
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driv-
er of the following situations
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Lane Departure warning system
(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Forward collision warning system
(FCWS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Smart cruise control system
(SCC) malfunction (if equipped)
- High beam assist system (HBA)
malfunction (if equipped)
- Service required
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
(ex : refill the washer fluid)
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates :
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks :
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Features of your vehicle
1164
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates :
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
ECOMINDER
®
indicator
Active ECO system
This indicator light illuminates :
When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECOMINDER®indicator
(green) will illuminate to show that
the Active ECO is operating.
For more detailed information, refer
to "Active ECO" or "Drive mode" in
chapter 5.
COMPORT Mode
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates :
• When you select “COMPORT”
mode as drive mode.
❈For more details, refer to “Drive
Mode” in chapter 5.
ECO
COMPORT
4117
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks :
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds :
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds :
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off :
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
1184
This indicator light blinks :
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks :
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
4119
Features of your vehicle
High beam assist
indicator (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the high-Beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light posi-
tion.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the High beam
assist system will switch the high
beam to low beam automatically.
For more details, refer to "High beam
assist" in this chapter.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the front fog lights are on.
Washer Fluid Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the
washer fluid.
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
CRUISE
Features of your vehicle
1204
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
KEY OUT indicator
(if equipped)
When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC or ON position,
if any door is open, the system
checks for the smart key. If the smart
key is not in the vehicle, the indicator
will blink, and if all doors are closed,
the chime will also sound for about 5
seconds. The indicator will go off
while the vehicle is moving.
SET KEY
OUT
4121
Features of your vehicle
The rear parking assist system
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming if
any object is sensed within a distance
of 47 in. (120 cm) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it
replace the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The sensing
range and objects detectable by the
back sensors are limited. Whenever
backing-up, pay as much attention to
what is behind you as you would in a
vehicle without a rear parking assist
system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the
indicator on the rear parking assist
OFF button is not illuminated. If
you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the
rear parking assist OFF button
again. (The indicator on the button
will illuminate.) To turn the system
on, press the button again. (The
indicator on the button will go off.)
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Rear parking
assist system
Never rely solely on the rear
parking assist system. Always
perform a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction. Stop
immediately if you are aware of
a child anywhere near your vehi-
cle. Some objects may not be
detected by the sensors, due to
the object's size or material.
OYP044061K
Sensors
Features of your vehicle
1224
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the
back-up warning system is in oper-
ation is approximately 120 cm (47
in.) at the rear bumper center area,
60 cm (23.5 in.) at the rear bumper
both side area.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm
(47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear
bumper : Buzzer beeps intermit-
tently.
• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm
(24 in. to 12 in.) from the rear
bumper : Buzzer beeps more fre-
quently.
• When an object is within 30 cm
(12 in.) of the rear bumper :
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate properly when :
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when the
moisture has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
4123
Features of your vehicle
The detecting range may decrease
when :
1. The sensor is stained with foreign
matter such as snow or water.
(The sensing range will return to
normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor :
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (40 in.) in height and narrower
than 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system
precautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not sound consistently
depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 40 cm (15 in.)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or
SOILED with snow, dirt, or water,
the sensor may be inoperative until
the MATERIAL IS removed using a
soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could
occur.
✽✽NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors. It cannot detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detected
by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
Features of your vehicle
1244
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the gear to the
R (Reverse) position, this may indi-
cate a malfunction in the rear parking
assist system. If this occurs, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽NOTICE
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
4125
Features of your vehicle
The Parking Assist System is not a
substitute for proper and safe park-
ing and backing-up procedures.
Always drive safely and use caution
when parking. The Parking Assist
System may not detect every object
behind or in front of the vehicle.
The parking assist system assists the
driver during movement of the vehicle
by chiming if any object is sensed
within the distance of 100 cm (39 in)
in front or behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem and it is not intended to nor does
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limit-
ed. When the vehicle moving, pay
attention to your surroundings.
Operation of the parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the
parking assist button is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
• The parking assist button turns on
automatically and activates the park-
ing assist system when you shift the
gear to the R (Reverse) position.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
OYP044062K
OYP044061K
Sensor
Sensor
OYP044063K
WARNING - Parking
assist system
Never rely solely on the parking
assist system. Always perform
a visual inspection to make
sure the vehicle is clear of all
obstructions before moving the
vehicle in any direction. Stop
immediately if you are aware of
a child anywhere near your
vehicle. Some objects may not
be detected by the sensors, due
to the object's size or material.
Features of your vehicle
1264
• The sensing distance while back-
ing up is approximately 100 cm (39
in.) when you are driving less than
10 km/h (6.2 mph).
• The sensing distance while moving
forward is approximately 100 cm
(39 in.) when you are driving less
than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
✽✽NOTICE
The system may not detect and
object if the distance from the object
is already less than approximately
25 cm (10 in.) when the system is
turned ON.
Types of warning sound and indicator
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward When driving
rearward
100 cm, ~ 61 cm
(39 in. ~ 24 in.) Front -Buzzer beeps
intermittently
120 cm, ~ 61 cm
(47 in. ~ 24 in.) Rear -Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60 cm, ~ 31 cm
(24 in. ~ 12 in.)
Front Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -Buzzer beeps
frequently
30 cm
(12 in.)
Front Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -Buzzer sounds
continuously
✽✽NOTICE
The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors status.
If the indicator blinks, the system should be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4127
Features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not
operate normally when :
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when mois-
ture melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water. (Sensing
range will return to normal when
removed.)
4. The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when :
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease
when :
1. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (39 in) and narrower than 14
cm (5.5 in) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor :
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Features of your vehicle
1284
✽✽NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound
sequentially depending on the
speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
2. The parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 30 cm (12 in) from the
sensor, or it may sense an incor-
rect distance. Use with caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or
stained with snow or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until
the stains are removed using a
soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
✽✽NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
or objects located between sensors
may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the system’s
capabilities and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the shift lever
into the R (Reverse) position, this
may indicate a malfunction in the
parking assist system. If this occurs,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to the
vehicle or injuries to its occupants
related to a parking assist system.
Always drive safely and cautiously.
4129
Features of your vehicle
The rearview camera will activate
with the ignition switch ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that shows behind the vehicle
through the rearview display mirror
while backing up unless equipped
with a navigation system, then will
display on the screen.
The rearview camera may be turned
off by pressing the ON/OFF button
when the rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press
the ON/OFF button again when the
ignition switch is on and the shift
lever in R (Reverse). Also, the cam-
era will turn on automatically when-
ever the ignition switch is turned off
and on again.
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
inside/outside rearview mirrors and
the area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up because
there is a dead zone that can't be
seen by the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with for-
eign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Backing &
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear view
camera when backing. You must
always use methods of viewing
the area behind you including
looking over both shoulders as
well as continuously checking all
three rear view mirrors. Due to
the difficulty of ensuring that the
area behind you remains clear,
always back slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.
OYP044064K
OYP044065K
Features of your vehicle
1304
The 360° camera monitoring system
is not a substitute for proper and safe
parking procedures. The 360° cam-
era monitoring system may not
detect every object surrounding the
vehicle. Always drive safely and use
caution when parking.
The 360° camera monitoring system
can assist in parking by allowing the
driver to see around the vehicle.
Push the button into the [ON] posi-
tion to operate the system.
To cancel the system, push the but-
ton again.
Operating conditions
- When the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON position
- When the transaxle is on D, N or R
- When the vehicle speed is not over
12.4 mph (20km/h)
• When the vehicle speed is over
12.4mph (20km/h), the 360° camera
monitoring system is turned off. If
the vehicle speed is not over
12.4mph (20km/h) after turning off
the 360° camera monitoring system
by over speed, the 360° camera
monitoring system is not turned on.
To operate again, push the button.
• When the vehicle moves back-
wards, regardless of On/Off of but-
ton and vehicle speed, the 360°
camera monitoring system is oper-
ated.
• When the trunk and driver/passen-
ger door are opened and the out-
side mirror is folded, the warning is
illuminated in 360° camera moni-
toring system.
• If the 360° camera monitoring sys-
tem is not operating normally, the
system should be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• When the vehicle moves over
10km/h forward after moving back-
ward, the 360° camera monitoring
system screen will be turned off.
360° CAMERA MONITORING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP044178K
WARNING
This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the area around the vehi-
cle before and while moving.
4131
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged if the lights are left in the
ON position. The system automati-
cally shuts off the parking lights 30
seconds after the ignition key is
removed and the driver’s door is
opened and closed.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of the road at night
and opens the driver’s side door.
If necessary, to keep the parking
lights on when the ignition key is
removed, perform the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Headlight escort function
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACC or OFF position with the head-
lights ON, the headlights remain on
for about 5 minutes. However, if the
driver's door is opened and closed,
the headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the trans-
mitter (or smart key) twice or turning
the light switch to the OFF position.
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver’s
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlight
escort function does not turn off
automatically. Therefore, It causes
the battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
Daytime running light
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will turn OFF when :
• The headlights are ON.
• Engine stops.
• The parking brake is applied.
LIGHTING
Features of your vehicle
1324
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Auto light position (if equipped)
(3) Position & Tail light
(4) Headlight position
Position & Tail light ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position, the tail, license and
instrument panel lights will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position, the head, tail, license
lights will turn ON.
✽✽NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
OKH042191 OKH042192
OKH042189
4133
Features of your vehicle
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will turn ON or OFF automati-
cally depending on the amount of
light outside the vehicle.
• Never place anything over the sen-
sor (1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better auto-
light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a win-
dow cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could inter-
fere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto light
system may not work properly.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams. The high beam
indicator will light when the headlight
high beams are switched on.To prevent
the battery from being discharged, do
not leave the lights on for a prolonged
time while the engine is not running.
OKH042194
OKH042190
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver’s vision.
Features of your vehicle
1344
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
High Beam Assist (if equipped)
The High Beam Assist is a system
that automatically adjusts the head-
lamp range (switches between high
beam and low beam) according to
the brightness of other vehicles and
road conditions.
Operating condition
1. Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2. Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The High Beam Assist ( ) indi-
cator will illuminate.
3. The High Beam Assist will turn on
when vehicle speed is above
45km/h (24.8mph).
• If the lever is pushed away when
the High Beam Assist is operat-
ing, the High Beam Assist will
turn off and the high beam will
be on continuously. The High
Beam Assist ( ) indicator will
turn off.
• If the lever is pulled towards you
when the High Beam Assist is
operating, the High Beam Assist
will turn off.
4. If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the High
Beam Assist will turn off and the
low beam will be on continuously.
OKH042193
OKH042195
4135
Features of your vehicle
The high beam switches to low beam
in the below conditions.
- When the High Beam Assist is off.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the headlamp is detected
from the on-coming vehicle.
- When the tail lamp is detected
from the front vehicle.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beam is not needed.
- When streetlights or other lights
are detected.
- When vehicle speed is below
35km/h (21.7mph).
The system may not operate normal-
ly in the below conditions.
• When the light from the on-coming
or front vehicle is not detected
because of lamp damage, hidden
from sight, etc.
• When the lamp of the on-coming or
front vehicle is covered with dust,
snow or water.
• When the light from the on-coming
or front vehicle is not detected
because of exhaust fume, smoke,
fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is covered
with foreign matters such as ice,
dust, fog, or is damaged.
• When there is a similar shape lamp
with the front vehicle’s lamps.
• When it is hard to see because of
fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not repaired
or replaced at an authorized dealer.
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow curved
road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle in
front is visible on a crossroad or
curved road.
• When there is a traffic light, reflect-
ing sign, flash sign or mirror.
• When the road conditions are bad
such as being wet or covered with
snow.
• When the front vehicle’s head-
lamps are off but the fog lamps on.
• When a vehicle suddenly appears
from a curve.
• When the vehicle is tilted from a
flat tire or being towed.
• When the LDWS (Lane Departure
Warning System) warning light illu-
minates. (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
1364
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windshield.
• Have the windshield glass replaced
from an authorized dealer.
• Do not remove or impact related
parts of the High Beam system.
• Be careful that water doesn’t get
into the High Beam unit.
• Do not place objects on the dash-
board that reflects light such as
mirrors, white paper, etc. The sys-
tem may malfunction if sunlight is
reflected.
• At times, the High Beam system
may not work properly, always
check the road conditions for your
safety. When the system does not
operate normally, manually change
between the high beam and low
beam.
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A).The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating. They
will self-cancel after a turn is com-
pleted. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
✽✽NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
OKH042196
4137
Features of your vehicle
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the OFF position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
OKH042197
Features of your vehicle
1384
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· HI – Continuous wipe
· LO – Intermittent wipe*
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)*
* if equipped
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this
(MIST/ ) position and
release it. The wipers will
operate continuously if the
lever is held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽✽NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer
OYP044181K OYP044182N
4139
Features of your vehicle
Front windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
OYP044185K
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
CAUTION - Wipers &
windshields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision.
Features of your vehicle
1404
Rear window wiper and wash-
er switch
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI : Continuous wipe
LO : Intermittent wipe
OFF : OFF
The rear window wiper is switched
on automatically when the ignition is
in OFF and the gear is shifted to R
(Reverse) while the wiper is in
motion.
The automatic rear wiper function
can be turned on or off in 'User set-
ting mode' on the cluster display.
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever
OYP044264N
OYP044186N
4141
Features of your vehicle
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off, if the
lights are in the ON position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately
3 seconds after the system in armed
stage.
Room lamp
Press the button(1) or lens(1) to turn
the light on or off.
If the front map lamp turns on by the
front map lamp switch, the room
lamp will turn on.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
WARNING - Interior lights
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights. OYP044067K
OYP044068N
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
1424
Map lamp
Press the lens (1) to turn the map
lamp on or off
• (2) : The light comes on when
any door (or tailgate) is
opened regardless of the
ignition switch position.
When doors are unlocked
by the transmitter (or
smart key) or the key is
removed from the ignition
switch, the light comes on
for approximately 30 sec-
onds as long as any door
is not opened. The light
goes out gradually after
approximately 30 sec-
onds if the door is closed.
However, if the ignition
switch is ON or all doors
are locked, the light will
turn off immediately. If a
door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC
or LOCK position, the
light stays on for about
20 minutes. However, if a
door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON
position, the light stays
on continuously.
• (3) : The light stays on at all
times.
✽✽NOTICE
• The mode and mode can not
be selected at the same time.
• When the lamp is turned on by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp does
not turn off even if the mode or
mode is not selected (not
pressed).
OYP044066N
4143
Features of your vehicle
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
• DOOR : The light comes on when
the tailgate is opened.
• OFF :The light stays off at all times.
• ON : The light stays on at all times.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror
will automatically turn on the mirror
light.
Portable lamp usage
(if equipped)
1. In-vehicle lamp, if necessary, after
separation can be used as a
portable.
2. Press push button (1).
3. Pull out the lamp holder.
4. Press the power switch (2).
❈If the portable lamp does not turn
on, it means the portable lamp
needs to be charged. Insert the
lamp holder and then charge it
again. The charge mode will be
activated if the ignition switch (or
engine start/stop button) is on
position or engine is running.
OHG040128
OYP044069K
OYP044277N
■ Type B
■ Type A
OYP044266N
Features of your vehicle
1444
1. Remove the batteries when not in
use for a long time.
2. Use the specified battery.
3.You can use the regular batteries
(Disposable batteries) but do not
use the Non-rechargeable battery
in charge mode. It may damage
the vehicle.
4. Do not place the lamp with water
or moist places and liquid com-
pounds. These can cause internal
leakage of a battery.
5. When replacing the batteries,
check the direction and insert.
It will not be charged if installed
reversely.
6. Do not mix the rechargeable bat-
teries.
It may not be charged normally.
7. Do not place the lamp or batteries
near fire or heat. It can cause
internal leakage of a battery.
8. Do not apply electrical shock with
portable charging terminals of the
lamp.
It can cause internal leakage of a
battery or damage the portable
lamp.
9. If the portable lamp does not turn
on anymore after charged, replace
the rechargeable batteries.
Battery replacement
When replacement is necessary, use
the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently try open the battery cover.
2. Replace the batteries with new
rechargeable batteries (AAA size).
When replacing the batteries,
make sure the position of batteries.
3. Close the cover carefully.
OTAM041101
4145
Features of your vehicle
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illu-
minates when the defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear win-
dow defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
OYP044200K
OYP044201K
■ Automatic type
■ Manual type
Features of your vehicle
1464
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP044202K
1. Front fan speed control knob
2. Front window defroster button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Air conditioning button
5. Air intake control button
6. Front temperature control knob
7. Front mode selection button
8. Rear fan speed control knob
9. Rear temperature control knob
10. Rear control lock button
11. Rear control on button
■■Front
4147
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position (if
equipped).
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
OYP044245K
Features of your vehicle
1484
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Six
symbols are used to represent MAX
A/C, Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-
Defrost and Defrost air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster.
Face-Level (A, B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (A, B, C, D, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
OYP044204K
4149
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm and
hot air or left position for cooler air.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, press the control button.
OYP044207K
OYP044206K
OYP044208K
■Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1504
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas-
senger compartment may become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation
(if equipped)
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the orig-
inal position that was selected.
4151
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
WARNING - Reduced
visibility
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
WARNING - Sleeping
with AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
OYP044209K
Features of your vehicle
1524
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
OYP044210K
4153
Features of your vehicle
OYP044212K
1. Rear air conditioning OFF button
2. Rear fan speed control button
3. Rear mode selection button
4. Rear temperature control button
■■Rear
Features of your vehicle
1544
Rear climate control
(if equipped)
To turn on the rear climate control
system;
From the front seat
1. Set the rear climate control selec-
tion (REAR ON) button in the front
climate control panel to the ON
position.
2. Set the rear fan speed control
knob in the front climate control
panel to the desired position.
3. Set the rear temperature control
knob in the front climate control
panel to the desired position.
From the rear seat
1. Set the rear climate control selec-
tion (REAR ON) button in the front
climate control panel to the ON
position.
2. Set the rear climate control selec-
tion (REAR LOCK) button in the
front climate control panel to the
OFF position.
3. Set the rear fan speed control but-
ton on the rear climate control
panel to the desired position.
4. Set the rear temperature control
button on the rear climate control
panel to the desired position.
5. Select the desired rear mode button
on the rear climate control panel.
6. To turn off the rear air conditioning
system, press the off button in the
rear climate control panel.
4155
Features of your vehicle
Rear fan speed control
From front seat
Set the rear climate control selection
(REAR ON) button to the ON posi-
tion and turn the rear fan speed con-
trol (REAR) knob in the front climate
control panel to the desired position.
To change the rear fan speed, turn
the knob to the right for higher speed
or left for lower speed.
From rear seat
Set the rear climate control selection
(REAR ON) button in the front cli-
mate control panel to the ON posi-
tion and set the rear climate control
selection(REAR LOCK) button in the
front climate control panel to the
OFF position and press the rear fan
speed control button on the rear con-
trol panel to the desired position.
To turn off the rear air conditioning
system press the off button in the
rear climate control panel.
Rear temperature control
From front seat
Set the rear climate control selection
(REAR ON) button to the ON posi-
tion and turn the rear temperature
control (REAR TEMP) knob in the
front climate control panel to the
desired position.
To change the rear air temperature,
turn the knob to the right position for
warm and hot air or left position for
cooler air.
OYP044213K
OYP044214K
OYP044215K
Features of your vehicle
1564
From rear seat
Set the rear climate control selection
(REAR ON) button in the front cli-
mate control panel to the ON posi-
tion and set the rear climate control
selection(REAR LOCK) button in the
front climate control panel to the
OFF position.
To change the rear air temperature,
press the button ( ) for warmer air
or press the button ( ) for cooler air.
Rear mode selection (if equipped)
• Front climate control is MAX A/C,
:
Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling.
• Front climate control is :
Rear air blows from the upper vents
on the rear ceiling and the lower
vents on the right rear trim together.
• Front climate control is , :
Rear air blows from the lower vents
on the right rear trim.
When the rear climate control selec-
tion (REAR ON) button in the front
climate control panel is in the ON
position and set the rear climate con-
trol selection(REAR LOCK) button in
the front climate control panel to the
OFF position and the rear mode is
selected by pushing the rear mode
selection button on the rear control
panel as follows:
OYP044216K OYP044217K OYP044218K
4157
Features of your vehicle
• : Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling.
• : Rear air blows from the
upper vents on the rear ceil-
ing and the lower vents on
the right rear trim together.
• : Rear air blows from the lower
vents on the right rear trim.
Rear vents (if equipped)
The vent can be adjusted by rotating
the blade.
✽✽NOTICE
If all the vents are closed, it may
cause some noise. Always open 2
vents or more.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
OYP044166N
Features of your vehicle
1584
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
4159
Features of your vehicle
• The refrigerant system should only
be serviced by trained and certified
technicians to insure proper and
safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be repaired
or replaced with one removed from
a used or salvaged vehicle and new
replacement MAC evaporators shall
be certified (and labeled) as meet-
ing SAE Standard J2842.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
CAUTION
• When using the air condition-
ing system, monitor the tem-
perature gauge closely while
driving up hills or in heavy traf-
fic when outside temperatures
are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause
engine overheating. Continue
to use the blower fan but turn
the air conditioning system off
if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air condition-
ing may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since
excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical
equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the
windows closed.
Features of your vehicle
1604
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent cli-
mate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system should be checked at an
authorized Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
4161
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - AC Repair
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle’s air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pressure.
If proper service procedures are
not followed an explosion may
result. To reduce the risk of seri-
ous injury or death, the air con-
ditioning system in your vehicle
should only be serviced by
trained and certified technicians.
CAUTION - AC Repair
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle may
occur. To prevent damage, the
air conditioning system in your
vehicle should only be serviced
by trained and certified techni-
cians.
Features of your vehicle
1624
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP044220K/OYP044221K
1. Driver`s temperature control knob
2. AUTO(automatic control) button
3. A/C display
4. Passenger’s temperature control knob
5. SYNC temperature control selection
button
6. Front fan speed control button
7.Front blower off button
8. Front mode selection button
9. Rear fan speed control button
10. A/C on button
11. Air intake control button
12. Front windshield defroster button
13. Rear window defroster button
14. Rear control lock button
15. Rear control on button
16. Rear temperature control knob
17. Climate information screen selection
button
■■Type B
■■Type A
4163
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Press the AUTO button. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by setting the tem-
perature.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature.
✽✽NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The AUTO
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23°C (73°F).
OYP044222K
OYP044226K
■Driver’s side ■Passenger’s side
Features of your vehicle
1644
✽✽NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
OYP044223K
4165
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
OYP044224K
■Type A ■Type B
Features of your vehicle
1664
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the extreme right.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the extreme left.
When turning the knob, the tempera-
ture will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
OYP044225K
■Type A ■Type B
OYP044206K
OYP044226K
■Driver’s side ■Passenger’s side
4167
Features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the SYNC button to activate
SYNC mode. The passenger side
temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver
side.
2. Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control knob. The driver and
passenger side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the SYNC button again to
operate the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. Also,
if the passenger side temperature
control knob is operated, it will
individually.
2. Operate the left temperature con-
trol to adjust the driver side tem-
perature. Operate the right side
temperature control to adjust the
passenger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is
set to the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo)
temperature setting, the SYNC mode
is deactivated for maximum heating
or cooling.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit
as follows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
OYP044227K
Features of your vehicle
1684
Outside thermometer The current outside temperature is
displayed in 1°C (1°F) increments.
The temperature range is between
-40°C ~ 60°C (- 40°F ~ 140°F).
• The outside temperature on the
display may not change immedi-
ately like a general thermometer to
prevent the driver from being inat-
tentive.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
OYP044311C
OYP044310C
OYP044309C
OYP044228K
4169
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas-
senger compartment may become
stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation
(if equipped)
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the orig-
inal position that was selected.
Features of your vehicle
1704
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by operating the fan
speed control button.
To change the fan speed, press ( )
the button for higher speed, or push
( ) the button for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the front blower OFF button.
OYP044229K
■Type A ■Type B
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING - Reduced
visibility
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
WARNING - Sleeping
with AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
4171
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the front blower OFF button to
turn off the front air climate control
system. However, you can still oper-
ate the mode and air intake buttons
as long as the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
Climate information screen selec-
tion (for Type B)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
OYP044231K
OYP044253N
OYP044230K
Features of your vehicle
1724
OYP044234K
1. Rear temperature control button
2. Rear AUTO button
3. Rear mode selection button
4. Rear air conditioning OFF button
5. Rear fan speed control button
■■Rear
4173
Features of your vehicle
Rear climate control
(if equipped)
To turn on the rear climate control
system;
From the front seat
1. Set the rear climate control selec-
tion (REAR ON) button in the front
climate control panel to the ON
position.
2. Set the rear fan speed control but-
ton in the front climate control
panel to the desired position.
3. Set the rear temperature control
knob in the front climate control
panel to the desired position. (if
equipped)
From the rear seat
1. Set the rear climate control selec-
tion (REAR ON) button in the front
climate control panel to the ON
position.
2. Set the rear climate control selec-
tion(REAR LOCK) button in the
front climate control panel to the
OFF position.
3. Set the rear fan speed control but-
ton on the rear climate control
panel to the desired position.
4. Set the rear temperature control
button on the rear climate control
panel to the desired position.
5. Select the desired rear mode but-
ton on the rear climate control
panel. (if equipped)
6. To turn off the rear air conditioning
system press the off button in the
rear climate control panel.
Rear fan speed control
From front seat
Set the rear climate control selection
(REAR ON) button to the ON posi-
tion and press the rear fan speed
control button in the front climate
control panel to the desired position.
To change the fan speed, press
( ) the button for higher speed, or
press the ( ) the button for lower
speed. To turn the fan speed control
off, press the REAR ON button.
OYP044235K
Features of your vehicle
1744
From rear seat (if equipped)
Set the rear climate control selection
(REAR ON) button in the front cli-
mate control panel to the ON posi-
tion and set the rear climate control
selection(REAR LOCK) button in the
front climate control panel to the
OFF position and press the rear fan
speed control button on the rear con-
trol panel to the desired position.
To change the fan speed, press
( ) the button for higher speed, or
press the ( ) the button for lower
speed. To turn the fan speed control
off, press the rear blower OFF button.
Rear temperature control
From front seat
Set the rear climate control selection
(REAR ON) button to the ON posi-
tion and press the rear fan speed
control button in the front climate
control panel to the desired position.
To change the rear air temperature,
turn the knob to the right position for
warm and hot air or left position for
cooler air.
From rear seat
Set the rear climate control selection
(REAR ON) button in the front cli-
mate control panel to the ON posi-
tion and set the rear climate control
selection(REAR LOCK) button in the
front climate control panel to the
OFF position and press the rear fan
speed control button on the rear con-
trol panel to the desired position.
To change the rear air temperature,
press the button ( ) for warmer air
or press the button ( ) for cooler air.
OYP044236K
OYP044248K
OYP044237K
4175
Features of your vehicle
Rear mode selection (if equipped)
• Front climate control is :
Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling.
• Front climate control is :
Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling and the
lower vents on the right rear trim
together.
• Front climate control is , :
Rear air blows from the lower vents
on the right rear trim together.
When the rear climate control selec-
tion (REAR ON) button in the front
climate control panel is in the ON
position and set the rear climate con-
trol selection (REAR LOCK) button in
the front climate control panel to the
OFF position and the rear mode is
selected by pushing the rear mode
selection button on the rear control
panel as follows:
• : Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling.
• : Rear air blows from the
upper vents on the rear ceil-
ing and the lower vents on
the right rear trim together.
• : Rear air blows from the lower
vents on the right rear trim.
OYP044217K
OYP044239K
Features of your vehicle
1764
Rear vents
The vent can be adjusted by rotating
the blade.
✽✽NOTICE
If all the vents are closed, it may
cause some noise. Always open 2
vents or more.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
OYP044166N
4177
Features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
CAUTION - Excessive A/C
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine
coolant closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating
and potential engine damage.
Continue to use the blower fan
but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicates
engine overheating.
Features of your vehicle
1784
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the cli-
mate control air filter replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
4179
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• Replace the filter every 24,000 km
(15,000 miles) or once a year.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air con-
ditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - AC Repair
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle’s air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pressure.
If proper service procedures are
not followed an explosion may
result. To reduce the risk of seri-
ous injury or death, the air con-
ditioning system in your vehicle
should only be serviced by
trained and certified technicians.
CAUTION - AC Repair
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle may
occur. To prevent damage, the
air conditioning system in your
vehicle should only be serviced
by trained and certified techni-
cians.
Features of your vehicle
1804
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and the
windshield could cause the
outer surface of the windshield
to fog up, causing loss of visi-
bility. In this case, set the mode
selection to the position
and fan speed control to the
lower speed. OYP044240K
4181
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically press the correspon-
ding button manually.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the correspon-
ding button manually. If the posi-
tion is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
OYP044241K
OYP044242K
Features of your vehicle
1824
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning is con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return to the
defogging logic, do the following.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Turn the fan speed control knob to
the OFF (0) position.
3. Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position ( ).
4. Push the air intake control button
( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-
onds.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OYP044243K OYP044256N
4183
Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Select the defroster position press-
ing the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The recirculation indicator blinks 3
times with 0.5 second of interval. It
indicates that the defogging logic is
canceled or returned to the pro-
grammed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Auto defogging system
(if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the probabil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
OYP044258N
OYP044259N
Features of your vehicle
1844
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the mois-
ture of inside the wind-
shield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,
higher steps operate as follow. For
example if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 2 Blowing air toward
the windshield.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 :
Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 5 : Maximizing the air condi-
tioning
To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging
System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
When the ADS system is canceled,
[ADS OFF] symbol will blink 3 times
per 0.5 sec and the position [ADS
OFF] will be displayed on the climate
control information screen. (A TYPE)
When the ADS system is canceled,
Indicator on the button will blink 3
times per 0.5 sec. (B TYPE)
When the ADS system is reset, [ADS
OFF] symbol will blink 6 times per
0.5sec and the position [ADS OFF]
will be disappeared on the climate
control information screen. (A TYPE)
When the ADS system is reset,
Indicator on the button will blink 6
times per 0.25sec. (B TYPE)
✽✽NOTICE
If the A/C off or recirculated air
position is manually selected while
the auto defogging system is on, the
auto defogging indicator will blink 3
times to give notice that manual
operation is canceled.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
4185
Features of your vehicle
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch turns to the OFF position.
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP044244N
Features of your vehicle
1864
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or passengers.
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover can not close securely.
OYP044187K
OYP044073N
OYP044071K
OYP044074K
OYP044072K
OYP044075K
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store, propane cylinders
or other flammable/explosive
materials in the vehicle. These
items may catch fire and/or
explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
4187
Features of your vehicle
Center console storage
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
OYP044070K WYP-901 WYP-902 WYP-903
Center console sliding tray removal procedure
➀Pull down the knob to slide the sliding tray.
➁Check the lever located on the floor of the sliding tray and pull on the lever
securely.
➂While pulling on the lever, remove the sliding tray.
Features of your vehicle
1884
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key. (if
equipped)
To open the glove box, pull the han-
dle and the glove box will automati-
cally open. Close the glove box after
use.
✽✽ NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in
the warm or hot position, warm or
hot air will flow into the glove box.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, move
the sliding storage to backward.
OYP044188KOYP044076K
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
4189
Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
✽✽NOTICE
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle’s electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage elec-
trical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle. OYP044189K
OYP044262N OYP04434N
OYP044081K
■Front
Type A
■Front
Type B
■Center
■Rear (if equipped)
Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.
Features of your vehicle
1904
Bottle holder
Bottles may be placed in the holder.
✽✽NOTICE
Only bottles should be place in the
holder as it is written in the vehicle
“BOTTLE ONLY”.
Seat warmer (if equipped) The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
✽✽NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatical-
ly depending on the seat tempera-
ture.
OYP044194K
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
OYP044083K
OYP044318N
■Front seat
• Type A
■Front seat
• Type B
OYP044084N
■Rear seat
4191
Features of your vehicle
Seat cooler (Air ventilation seat)
(if equipped)
The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch
position.
• If you want to cool your seat cush-
ion, press the switch (blue color).
• Each time you press the button,
the airflow will change as follows:
• The seat warmer (with air ventila-
tion) defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
OYP044085K
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
WARNING - Seat heater
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low tempera-
tures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passengers
who may not be able to take
care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns.These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel.
Before using the air ventilation
seat, dry the seat completely.
Features of your vehicle
1924
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (3). (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehi-
cle may differ from the illustration.
Power outlet
OYP044086K
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
If you use the vanity mirror lamp,
turn off the lamp before return-
ing the sunvisor to its original
position, otherwise it could
result in battery discharge and
possible sunvisor damage.
OYP044087K
OYP044088K
■Front
OYP044089N
■Rear
4193
Features of your vehicle
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
• Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged peri-
ods of time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater
to the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when
plugged into a vehicle’s power out-
let. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunc-
tions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
AC inverter (if equipped)
WARNING - Electric shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pen, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get an elec-
tric shock.
OYP044090N
OYP044091N
OYP044319N
Features of your vehicle
1944
The AC inverter supplies 115V/100W
electric power to operate electric
accessories or equipments.
If you wish to use the AC inverter,
press the AC inverter button while
the engine is running. The light on
the AC inverter button will illuminate.
If you press the AC inverter button
again, the AC inverter will be deacti-
vated and the light on the AC invert-
er button will turn off.
✽✽NOTICE
When turning on the AC inverter,
the indicator on the AC inverter but-
ton illuminates late while the system
conducts a self-check.
✽✽NOTICE
• Rated voltage : AC 115V
• Maximum electric power : 100W
• In order to avoid an electrical sys-
tem failure, electric shock, etc., be
sure to read owner's manual
before use.
• Be sure to close the cover except
the time of use.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the AC
inverter while the engine is not run-
ning.
• When not using the AC inverter,
make sure to turn off the AC invert-
er (the indicator on the button does
not illuminate) and close the AC
inverter cover.
• After using an electric accessory or
equipment, pull the plug out.
Leaving the accessory or equip-
ment plugged in for a long time
may cause battery discharge.
• Do not use an electric accessory
or equipment the power consump-
tion of which is greater than 100W
(115V).
OYP074067N
4195
Features of your vehicle
USB charger (if equipped)
The USB charger is designed to
recharge batteries of small size elec-
trical devices using a USB cable.The
electrical devices can be recharged
when the Engine Start/Stop button is
in ACC/ON/START position.
The battery charging state may be
monitored on the electrical device.
Disconnect the USB cable from the
USB port after use.
• Some devices are not supported
for fast charging but will be
charged with normal speed.
• Use the USB charger when the
engine is running to prevent bat-
tery discharge.
• Only devices that fits the USB port
can be used.
• The USB charger can be used only
for battery charging purposes.
• Battery chargers cannot be
charged.
CAUTION - Electric acces-
sory devices
• Do not use broken electric
accessories which may dam-
age the AC inverter and elec-
trical systems of the vehicle.
• Do not use two or more electric
accessories at the same time. It
may cause damage to the elec-
trical systems of the vehicle.
OYP044246K
OYP044097N
■Front
■ Rear
Features of your vehicle
1964
Clock (if equipped)
Hour (1)
Pressing the H button will advance
the time displayed by one hour.
Minute (2)
Pressing the M button will advance
the time displayed by one minute.
To change the 24 hour format to the
12 hours format (if equipped), while
pressing the “H” button, press the “M”
button for 3 seconds or more. For
example, if the “H” and “M” buttons
are pressed for more than 3 seconds
while the time is 22:15, the display
will change to 10:15.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
❈This actual feature may differ from the illus-
tration.
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
OYP044191K OYP044164K
CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
4197
Features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor (s)
(if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
cle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side floor
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floor mat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.
Side curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain :
1. Lift the curtain by the handle (1).
2. Hang the curtain on the hooks on
both sides of the handle.
OYP044092K
OYP044093K
OXM043309
OYP044312N
■Driver seat ■Passenger seat
■ Rear seat
Features of your vehicle
1984
To avoid injury or damage to the side
curtain and door moldings, lower
side curtain by the handle all the way
back to the stowed position. Do not
release handle after disengaging
from the hooks on the door.
4199
Features of your vehicle
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
✽✽NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-
roof, be sure not to position cargo
onto the roof rack in such a way that
it could interfere with sunroof oper-
ation.
✽✽NOTICE
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof length
or width.
• When you are carrying cargo on
the roof rack, do not operate the
sunroof (if equipped).
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible on the roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight limit
on the roof rack may damage your
vehicle.
EXTERIOR FEATURES
OYP044095K
ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Features of your vehicle
2004
• Always drive slowly and turn corners
carefully when carrying items on the
roof rack. Severe wind updrafts,
caused by passing vehicles or natu-
ral causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items loaded on
the roof rack. This is especially true
when carrying large, flat items such
as wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off the
roof rack and cause damage to your
vehicle or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo
while driving, check frequently
before or while driving to make
sure the items on the roof rack are
securely fastened.
WARNING - Driving with
roof load
Always drive slow and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack.The vehi-
cle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack.
4201
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
If you install an after market HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
Antenna
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive AM or/and FM broadcast sig-
nals.
When reinstalling your roof antenna,
it is important that it is fully tightened
and adjusted to the upright position
to ensure proper reception.
Steering wheel remote
controller
(1) VOLUME
Used to control volume.
(2) SEEK
When pressed briefly (less than 1
second).
- FM, AM mode : searches broadcast
frequencies saved to presets.
- CD, USB, iPod®, My Music, BT
Audio mode : changes the track, file.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OYP044249K
OYP044270N
Features of your vehicle
2024
When pressed and held (more than
1 second).
- FM, AM mode : automatically
searches broadcast frequencies
and channels.
- CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or
file.
(3) MUTE
Mutes audio volume.
(4) MODE
Each time this key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1,
FM2, AM, CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio.
If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding
modes will be disabled.
Press and hold the key (more than 1
second) to turn the audio system
on/off.
When power is off, press the key to
turn power back on.
(5) (if equipped)
When pressed briefly.
- When pressed in the phone screen,
displays call history screen.
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call.
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call.
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call Waiting).
When pressed and held (more than 1
second).
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call.
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call, switches call back to mobile
phone (Private).
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back to
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected).
(6) (if equipped)
Ends phone call.
(7) (if equipped)
When pressed briefly.
- Starts voice recognition.
- When selected during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and con-
verts to voice command waiting
state.
When pressed and held (more than 1
second).
- Ends voice recognition.
❈ The
Bluetooth®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Kia is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A compatible
Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth®
wire-
less technology.
4203
Features of your vehicle
Aux, USB port
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port, you
can use an aux port to connect audio
devices and an USB and also an
iPod®.
✽✽NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
* iPod®is a Registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod®mobile digital
device sold separately. Connectivity
may require use of the Kia acces-
sory cable.
OYP044190K
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
2044
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
JBM002
AM reception
JBM001
FM reception
4205
Features of your vehicle
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions. This can
lead to undesirable or unpleasant lis-
tening conditions which might lead
you to believe a problem exists with
your radio. The following conditions
are normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
nal weakens, another more power-
ful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM005JBM004
Features of your vehicle
2064
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possi-
ble.
When using a communication sys-
tem such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-
rate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING - Cell phone
use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
WARNING - Audio System
Do not disassemble, assemble,
or modify the audio system.
Such acts could result in fire or
electric shock.
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
CAUTION
Refrain from use if the screen is
blank or no sound can be hear
as these signs may indicate
product malfunction.
4207
Features of your vehicle
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle. Driving
in a state where external sounds
cannot be heard may lead to acci-
dents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sud-
den output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using the audio system. Do not
operate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition
turned off as such operations may
lead to battery discharge.
CAUTION - LCD Monitor
Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
CAUTION - Device
cleaning
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth.
• Never use tough materials,
chemical cloths, or solvents
(alcohol, benzene, thinners,
etc.) as such materials may
damage the device panel or
cause color/quality deteriora-
tion.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause dam-
age or discoloration.
• In case of product malfunc-
tion, please contact your place
of purchase or After Service
center.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
Features of your vehicle
2084
USING THE USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the vehi-
cle. Connect the device after start-
ing up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned
off while the external USB device is
connected, the external USB
device may not work.
• The System may not play unau-
thenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electrici-
ty when connecting or disconnect-
ing the external USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connect-
ed external USB device can be
unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recog-
nized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recog-
nizable.
• Make sure the USB connection ter-
minal does not come in contact
with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or dis-
connect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting
a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device
can be damaged or may malfunc-
tion. Therefore, disconnect the
external USB device when the
audio is turned off or in another
mode. (e.g, Radio)
• Depending on the type and capac-
ity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time for recognition the device.
• Do not use the USB device for pur-
poses other than playing music
files.
• Playing videos through the USB is
not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
4209
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal
of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by log-
ical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are recog-
nized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may not
be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (i-stick
type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
MENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory products
which can be used as
key chains or cellular
phone accessories as they could
cause damage to the USB jack.
Please make certain only to use
plug type connector products.
Features of your vehicle
2104
USING iPod®DEVICE
iPhone®is a registered grademark of
Apple inc.
• Some iPod®models may not sup-
port communication protocol and
files may not properly play.
Supported iPod®models:
- iPhone®3GS/4
- iPod®touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod®nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod®classic
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod®can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
• If the iPod®is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod®.
(Reset: Refer to iPod®manual)
• An iPod®may not operate normally
on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod®devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected
through the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology interface. The device
must have audio
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology capability
(such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology ).
The device can play, but it will not
be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod®features within the
audio, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod®device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the char-
acteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®
device.
• If your iPhone®is connected to
both the
Bluetooth
®Wireless
Technology and USB, only support
iPod®mode because the sound
may not be properly played in
Bluetooth
®Audio Streaming.To use
Bluetooth
®Audio Streaming, dis-
connect iPod®cable with iPhone®.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod®with the
iPod®Power Cable, insert the con-
nector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted complete-
ly, communications between iPod®
and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod®and the audio system,
the sound effects of both devices
will overlap and might reduce or
distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod®when adjust-
ing the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer of
an iPod®.
• When not using iPod®with car
audio, detach the iPod®cable from
iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®may remain
in accessory mode, and may not
work properly.
• Beside support 1M cable when pur-
chasing iPod/iPhone products,
Long Cable cannot be recognized.
4211
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology(if equipped)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth®word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
A Bluetooth®enabled call phone is
required to use Bluetooth®wireless
technology.
Before Using the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree
What is Bluetooth®?
• Bluetooth®refers to a short-dis-
tance wireless networking technolo-
gy which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz
frequency to connect various
devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth®phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and auto-
motive environments, Bluetooth®
allows data to be transmitted at high
speeds without having to use a con-
nector cable.
• Bluetooth®Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth®mobile phones through
the audio system.
• Bluetooth®Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit http://www.kia.
com/us/en/content/owners/blue-
tooth.
Precautions for Safe Driving
• Bluetooth®Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice
safe driving. Connecting the head
unit with a Bluetooth®phone allows
the user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth®, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driving
practices and result in accidents.
Refrain from excessive operations
while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
2124
When connecting a
Bluetooth®
Phone
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone sup-
ports Bluetooth®features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth®power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or turn
on the Bluetooth®power prior to
searching/connecting with the
Head unit.
• If you do not want automatic con-
nection with your Bluetooth®device,
turn off the Bluetooth®feature with-
in your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth®connection may become
intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps
to try again.
1.Within the mobile phone, turn
the Bluetooth®function off/on
and try again.
2.Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3.Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4.Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5.Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
4213
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition
(if equipped)
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are sup-
ported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recogni-
tion mode.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is set
to high
- When entering and passing through
tunnels
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is con-
nected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice infor-
mation. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly oper-
ate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
mal conversation.
Features of your vehicle
2144
The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.
Before reading the manual, check the following.
Press the key in FM Radio screen.
1. If you can find “FM <89.1>”on the screen,
(Go to 4-215 page)
2. If you can find “FM <87.5~107.9>”on the screen,
(Go to 4-264 page)
4215
Features of your vehicle
(equipped with
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology)
■■ Type A-2
CD Player
■■ Type A-1
Features of your vehicle
2164
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
❈Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(1) (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2)
Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟AM ➟SAT1 ➟SAT2 ➟SAT3.
❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(3)
Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
❈In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(4)
Operates Phone Screen
❈When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) POWER/VOL knob
Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
(6)
Radio Mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (less than 1
second): Moves to next or previous
song (file)
- Press and hold the key (more than
1 second): Rewinds or fast-for-
wards the current song.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
51
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
■■ Type A-1
4217
Features of your vehicle
(7)
It sets the screen Off ➟Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
(8)
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each.
- Press and hold the key (more than
1 second): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
❈Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈SAT Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (less than 1
second): Previews each song (file)
for 10 seconds each.
❈Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
(9)
Moves to the Display, Sound, Phone,
System setting modes.
(10)
Displays menus for the current mode.
❈iPod®List : Move to parent category
(11) TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right.
❈When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
(12)
Radio Mode
- SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search
MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search
CAT
FOLDER
MENU
SETUP
SCAN
SCAN
61
SCAN
DISP
Features of your vehicle
2184
(13) ~ (Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
Audio Head Unit
(for Type A-2)
(14)
Changes to FM/AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
(15)
Changes to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
SAT
FM/AM
2
1
61
■■ Type A-2
4219
Features of your vehicle
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes /
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2204
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Tone
This menu allows you to set the
Bass, Middle, Treble.
Select [Tone] Select menu through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Position
This menu allows you to set the
Fader, Balance.
Select [Position] Select menu
through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Fader, Balance : Selects the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
2
SETUP
4221
Features of your vehicle
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
[Off/On] of
TUNE
knob
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
Features of your vehicle
2224
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the key
Select
[System] Select menu through
TUNE knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• On :This mode is for beginner users
and provides detailed instructions
during voice command operation.
• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
SETUP
4223
Features of your vehicle
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
Set through
TUNE
knob
❈The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol
Features of your vehicle
2244
RADIO : FM, AM or SiriusXM SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): Automatically searches
for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): While holding the
key, frequency changes without
stopping. When the key is released,
automatically searches for the next
frequency from that point.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Pressing and hold-
ing the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): The broadcast frequen-
cy increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
scanning all frequencies, returns
and plays the current broadcast fre-
quency.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Previews the
broadcasts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
6
1
SCAN
6
1
61
SEEK
TRACK
4225
Features of your vehicle
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2264
SiriusXM®Satellite Radio
information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package.You’ll get over
140 channels, including commercial-
free music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium program-
ming. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception fac-
tors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv-
ice:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
4227
Features of your vehicle
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous USA, DC and PR
(with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm. ca. All fees and program-
ming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
Features of your vehicle
2284
SiriusXM RADIO
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-
month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SEEK
TRACK
RADIO
RADIO
4229
Features of your vehicle
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): Previews each broad-
cast for 5 seconds each
❈Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Category
Press the key Set through
the
TUNE
knob
• The display will indicate the catego-
ry menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the key to navigate cate-
gory list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
Preset
Press the key ~
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key
(more than 1 second): Pressing
and holding the desired key from
~ will save the current
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
61
61RADIO
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCANRADIO
Features of your vehicle
2304
✽✽NOTICE - Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls cat-
egory list.
• Press TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the
key Select [ Info] through the
TUNE knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
MENU
4231
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod®/ My Music
Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<Audio CD>
<MP3 CD>
<USB>
<My Music>
❈The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (press the key)
: Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat. 1 RPT
1 RPT
MEDIA
Features of your vehicle
2324
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (press the key) :
Plays all files within the current fold-
er in random order.
iPod®mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays
all files in random order.
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈If the key is pressed
again within 2 second, the previous
song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Fast forwards the
song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod®mode.
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2RDM
2 RDM
4233
Features of your vehicle
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈In iPod®mode, moves to the Parent
Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
MENU : Audio CD
Press the Audio CD mode
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current CD.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
Features of your vehicle
2344
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the MP3 CD/USB mode
key to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD/USB.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display. MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
4235
Features of your vehicle
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the
copied Music in My Music mode.
❈If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel copy-
ing is displayed.
❈If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU : iPod®
In iPod®mode, press the key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
and Search features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays iPod®category list.
❈Searching iPod®category is
key pressed, move to parent cate-
gory.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
6
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2364
MENU : My Music Mode
(for Type A-1)
In My Music mode, press the
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
4237
Features of your vehicle
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
➁ After selecting, press key
and select the delete menu.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2384
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
AUDIO (for Type A-1)
What is
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit
the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• The Bluetooth®word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Kia is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to
use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
On
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
4239
Features of your vehicle
Starting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈
T
he title / artist info may not be
supported in some mobile phone.
When it is not supported, no title /
no artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
Press or to play
previous or next song.
❈The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile
phones.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
Features of your vehicle
2404
PHONE (for Type A-1)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone connection, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power to OFF
Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mount controls
(1) key : Mutes the microphone
during a call.
(2) ,key : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
(3) key : Activates voice recogni-
tion.
(4) key : Places and transfers
calls.
(5) key : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Check call history and making call
- Shortly press (less than 1 second)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
- The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
- Press the key again to con-
nect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
- Press and hold (more than 1 sec-
ond) the key on the steering
remote controller.
- The most recently called number is
redialed.
❈If call history does not exist, a
screen asking whether to down-
load call history is displayed. (The
download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones)
-
+
4241
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(for Type A-1)
Pairing a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology feature.
The
Bluetooth®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
2424
Pairing key / key on
the Steering Remote Controller
When No Devices have been Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3.From your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered. Hear, enter the passkey
“0000” to pair your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device with
the car audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
4243
Features of your vehicle
Some phones (i.e., iPhone®,
AndroidTM and Blackberry®Phones)
may offer an option to allow accept-
ance of all future Bluetooth connec-
tion requests by default." and "Visit
http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/own
ers/bluetooth for additional informa-
tion on pairing your Bluetooth-
enabled mobile phone, and to view a
phone compatibility list.
• If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the follow-
ing screen. Select [Pair] button to
pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2444
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the vehi-
cle are as follows. Some features
may not be supported depending
on your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
-
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while
a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• Only
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat-
ed features are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of com-
munication range, turning the device
OFF, or a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology devices are automati-
cally searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.
SETUP
4245
Features of your vehicle
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2464
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
• Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
SETUP
4247
Features of your vehicle
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
SETUP SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2484
USING
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology (for Type A-1)
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu
screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access.
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
PHONE
4249
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call history
stored or a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed
calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not stored in Call
History.
PHONEPHONE
Features of your vehicle
2504
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously downloaded
data is maintained even if the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call his-
tory saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the sta-
tus bar.
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the con-
tact download feature has been
turned off within the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may require
device authorization upon attempt-
ing to download contacts. If down-
loading does not normally occur,
check the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device settings or the
screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported
Bluetooth®
devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.
MENU
PHONE
4251
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Setting (for Type A-1)
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Pairing a New Device
Press the
key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the
key
Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
SETUPSETUP
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
2524
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded
Downloading Contacts
Press the
key
Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the
key
Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
• While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
key.
SEEK
TRACK
SETUPSETUP
4253
Features of your vehicle
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the
key
Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
• To turn
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
key
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
SETUP
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2544
VOICE RECOGNITION
(for Type A-1)
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to
key
System] [Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruc-
tion and beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
2) Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
3) Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
4) Spell words completely, no abbre-
viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
SETUP
4255
Features of your vehicle
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
• While using voice command, press-
ing any steering wheel control or a
different key will end voice com-
mand.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold the
key on the steering wheel to
end voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Kia Voice Recognition System
may have difficulty understanding
some accents or uncommon
names. When using Voice
Recognition to place a call, speak in
a moderate tone, with clear pronun-
ciation
To maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
• Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• Spell words completely, no abbre-
viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
Features of your vehicle
2564
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
(BEEP)
4257
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
SAT1
➟
SAT2
➟
SAT3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
Features of your vehicle
2584
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
SIRIUS (Satellite) •
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
®
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite)
Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
SIRIUS
Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
1~3
4259
Features of your vehicle
• FM/AM radio Commands: Commands available dur-
ing FM, AM radio operation. • Satellite radio Commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Command Function
Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
Features of your vehicle
2604
• Audio CD Commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation. • MP3 CD / USB Commands: Commands available
during USB and MP3 CD operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder.
4261
Features of your vehicle
•iPod
®Commands: Commands available during iPod®
operation. • My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Features of your vehicle
2624
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
iPod®is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod®
mobile digital device sold separately. The
Bluetooth®word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under license.
SiriusXM services require a subscription sold sep-
arately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service after your trial, the
subscription plan you choose will automatically
renew thereafter and you will be charged according
to your chosen payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply.To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the 48 contiguous
USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-
gramming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark of Google,
Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of
Research In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks,
channel names and logos are the property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
4263
Features of your vehicle
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Features of your vehicle
2644
(equipped with
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology)
■■ Type A-2
CD Player
■■ Type A-1
4265
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
❈Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(1) (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2)
Changes to FM/AM/SIRIUS XM®
mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟AM ➟SAT1 ➟SAT2 ➟SAT3.
❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(3)
Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
❈In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(4)
Operates Phone Screen
❈When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) PWR/VOL knob
Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
(6)
Radio Mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (less than 1
second): Moves to next or previous
song (file)
- Press and hold the key (more than
1 second): Rewinds or fast-for-
wards the current song.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
51
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
■■ Type A-1
Features of your vehicle
2664
(7)
It sets the screen Off ➟Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
(8)
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each.
- Press and hold the key (more than
1 second): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
❈Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈SAT Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (less than 1
second): Previews each song (file)
for 10 seconds each.
❈Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
(9)
Moves to the Display, Sound, Phone,
System setting modes.
(10)
Displays menus for the current mode.
❈iPod®List : Move to parent category
(11) TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right.
❈When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
(12)
Radio Mode
SIRIUS XM®RADIO :
Category Search
MP3, CD, USB mode :
Folder Search
CAT
FOLDER
MENU
SETUP
SCAN
SCAN
61
SCAN
DISP
4267
Features of your vehicle
(13) ~ (Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
Audio Head Unit
(for Type A-2)
(14)
Changes to FM/AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
(15)
Changes to SIRIUS XM®Satellite
Radio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
SAT
FM/AM
2
1
61
■■ Type A-2
Features of your vehicle
2684
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes /
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
SETUP
4269
Features of your vehicle
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈Back : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
[Off/On] of
TUNE
knob
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
2
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2704
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the key Select
[System] Select menu through
TUNE knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• On :This mode is for beginner users
and provides detailed instructions
during voice command operation.
• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
Set through TUNE knob
❈The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol
SETUP
4271
Features of your vehicle
RADIO : FM, AM or
SIRIUS XM®
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): Automatically searches
for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): While holding the
key, frequency changes without
stopping. When the key is released,
automatically searches for the next
frequency from that point.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Pressing and hold-
ing the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): The broadcast frequen-
cy increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
scanning all frequencies, returns
and plays the current broadcast fre-
quency.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Previews the
broadcasts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10KHz
6
1
SCAN
6
1
61
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2724
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
MENU
4273
Features of your vehicle
Satellite Radio channels:
SIRIUS®Satellite Radio has over
130 channels, including 69 channels
of 100% commercial-free music, plus
sports, news, talk and entertainment
available nationwide in your vehicle.
For more information and a complete
list of SIRIUS®Satellite Radio chan-
nels, visit sirius.com in the United
States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada,
or call SIRIUS®at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway over-
passes, parking garages, dense
tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
SIRIUS®Satellite Radio service:
SIRIUS®Satellite Radio is a subscrip-
tion-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for installa-
tion in motor vehicles or factory installed,
as well as for the home, portable and
wireless devices, and through an Internet
connection on personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
installed SIRIUS®Satellite Radio system
include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SIRIUS®music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to
the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SIRIUS®
at 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
Sirius XM service requires a sub-
scription, sold separately, after 3-
month trial included with vehicle
purchase. If you decide to contin-
ue your Sirius XM service at the
end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically
renew and bill at then-current rates
until you call Sirius XM at 1-866-
635-2349 to cancel. See our
Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com.
Programming subject to change.
Sirius satellite service is available
only to those at least 18 and older
in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C.,
and PR (with coverage limitations).
Traffic information not available in
all markets. See siriusxm.com/traf-
fic for details. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trade-
marks of Sirius XM Radio Inc
SIRIUS XM®Satellite Radio information
Features of your vehicle
2744
SIRIUS XM®RADIO
Using SIRIUS XM®Satellite
Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3
month complimentary period of SIR-
IUS XM®Satellite Radio so you have
access to over 130 channels of
music, information, and entertain-
ment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
subscription to SIRIUS®Satellite
Radio, you will need to contact SIR-
IUS®Customer Care at 800-643-
2112. Have your 12 digit SID (Sirius
Identification Number) / ESN
(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To
retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the
radio, press the [RADIO] button, and
tune to channel zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
RADIO
4275
Features of your vehicle
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): Previews each broad-
cast for 5 seconds each
❈Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Category
Press the key Set through
the
TUNE
knob
• The display will indicate the catego-
ry menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the key to navigate cate-
gory list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
Preset
Press the key ~
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key
(more than 1 second): Pressing
and holding the desired key from
~ will save the current
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
✽✽Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SIRIUS XM®Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
61
61RADIO
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCANRADIO
Features of your vehicle
2764
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls cat-
egory list.
• Press TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the
key Select [ Info] through the
TUNE knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
MENU
4277
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod®/ My Music
Press the key to change the
mod mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<Audio CD>
<CD MP3>
<USB>
<My Music>
❈The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (press the key)
: Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat. 1 RPT
1 RPT
MEDIA
Features of your vehicle
2784
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (press the key) :
Plays all files within the current fold-
er in random order.
iPod®mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays
all files in random order.
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈If the key is pressed
again within 2 second, the previous
song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Fast forwards the
song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod®mode.
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2RDM
2 RDM
4279
Features of your vehicle
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈In iPod®mode, moves to the Parent
Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
Features of your vehicle
2804
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode key
to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder
Repeat, All Random, Information, and
Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
4281
Features of your vehicle
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the
copied Music in My Music mode.
❈If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel copy-
ing is displayed.
❈If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2824
MENU : iPod®
In iPod®mode, press the key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
and Search features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays iPod®category list.
❈Searching iPod®category is
key pressed, move to parent cate-
gory.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
4283
Features of your vehicle
MENU : My Music Mode
(for Type A-1)
In My Music mode, press the
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2844
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
➁ After selecting, press key
and select the delete menu.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
4285
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
AUDIO (for Type A-1)
What is
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit
the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Kia is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to
use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
❈ Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Streaming : Press the
key Select [Phone] Select [Audio
Streaming] through the TUNE
knob Set
/
Off
On
SETUP
On
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
2864
Starting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
• Previous / Next song
Press or to play
previous or next song.
❈The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
4287
Features of your vehicle
PHONE (for Type A-1)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone connection, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power to OFF
Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mount controls
(1) button : Mute the micro-
phone during a call.
(2) ,button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
(3) button : Activates voice recog-
nition.
(4) button : Places and transfers
calls.
(5) button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Check call history and making call
➀Shortly press (less than 1 second)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
➁The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
➂Press the key again to con-
nect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (more than 1 sec-
ond) the key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The most recently called number
is redialed.
-
+
Features of your vehicle
2884
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
(for Type A-1)
Pairing a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology feature.
The
Bluetooth®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
4289
Features of your vehicle
Pairing Key / Key on
the Steering Remote Controller
When No Devices have been Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3.From your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered. Hear, enter the passkey
“0000” to pair your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device with
the car audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2904
Some phones (i.e., iPhone®,
AndroidTM and Blackberry®Phones)
may offer an option to allow accept-
ance of all future Bluetooth connec-
tion requests by default." and "Visit
http://www.kia.com/#/bluetooth for
additional information on pairing your
Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone,
and to view a phone compatibility list.
• If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the follow-
ing screen. Select [Pair] button to
pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
PHONE
4291
Features of your vehicle
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the vehi-
cle are as follows. Some features
may not be supported depending
on your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
-
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while
a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• Only
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat-
ed features are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of com-
munication range, turning the device
OFF, or a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology devices are automati-
cally searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2924
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
SETUP
4293
Features of your vehicle
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
• Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2944
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
SETUPSETUP
4295
Features of your vehicle
USING
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology (for Type A-1)
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu
screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access.
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2964
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call history
stored or a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed
calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not stored in Call
History.
PHONE PHONE
4297
Features of your vehicle
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously downloaded
data is maintained even if the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call his-
tory saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the sta-
tus bar.
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the con-
tact download feature has been
turned off within the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may require
device authorization upon attempt-
ing to download contacts. If down-
loading does not normally occur,
check the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device settings or the
screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported
Bluetooth®
devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.
MENU
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2984
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Setting (for Type A-1)
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
SETUPSETUP
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
4299
Features of your vehicle
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
• While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
key.
SEEK
TRACK
SETUPSETUP
Features of your vehicle
3004
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
• To turn
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select “Yes”. SETUP
SETUP
4301
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
(for Type A-1)
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruc-
tion and beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
2) Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
3) Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
4) Spell words completely, no abbre-
viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
3024
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
• While using voice command, press-
ing any steering wheel control or a
different key will end voice com-
mand.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold the
key on the steering wheel to
end voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Kia Voice Recognition System
may have difficulty understanding
some accents or uncommon
names. When using Voice
Recognition to place a call, speak in
a moderate tone, with clear pronun-
ciation
To maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
• Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• Spell words completely, no abbre-
viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
4303
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.
(BEEP) Beep Beep.. (end beep)
Shortly pressing the
key (less than 1 second)
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Features of your vehicle
3044
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
SAT1
➟
SAT2
➟
SAT3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
4305
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
SIRIUS
®
(Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the SIRIUS
®
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played
SIRIUS®
screen.
SIRIUS
®
(Satellite)
Displays the selected SIRIUS
®
screen.
SIRIUS
®
Channel Plays the selected SIRIUS
®
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
1~3
Features of your vehicle
3064
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation. • Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Command Function
Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
4307
Features of your vehicle
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation. • MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder.
Features of your vehicle
3084
• iPod®Commands: Commands available during iPod®
operation. • My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4309
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
iPod®is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod®
mobile digital device sold separately. The
Bluetooth®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under license.
A
Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth®
wireless technology. Sirius XM®service
requires a subscription, sold separately, after 3-
month trial included with vehicle purchase. If you
decide to continue your Sirius XM®service at the
end of the trial subscription, the plan you choose
will automatically renew and bill at the current rates
until you call Sirius XM®at 1-866-635-2349 to can-
cel. See our Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com.
Sirius satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous United
States, D.C., and P.R. (with coverage limitations).
Sirius XM®Traffic available in select markets. See
siriusxm.com/traffic for more information. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark of
Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark
of Research In Motion Limited (RIM).
Features of your vehicle
3104
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Engine START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Illuminated engine START/STOP button . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Engine START/STOP button position . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
• Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise
control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph):. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
• To turn cruise control off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Smart cruise control system (SCC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• Speed setting (SCC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
• Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (SCC) . . . . . . . . . 5-42
• To adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control . . 5-46
• To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Limitations of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Active ECO operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• When Active ECO is activated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• DRIVE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• ECO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• Comfort mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• Non-operating condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 5-64
• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
• The LDWS does not operate when:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Foward collision warning system (FCWS) . . . . . 5-68
• FCWS Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
• Limitations of the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-79
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-80
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• Vehicle curb weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5
53
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system
does not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you
drive over something that strikes the
underneath side of the vehicle, have
the exhaust system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in a
enclosed area for a prolonged
time. Exhaust fumes contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless gas that can cause
unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
WARNING - Open tailgate
Do not drive with the tailgate
open. Poisonous exhaust gases
can enter the passenger com-
partment If you must drive with
the tailgate open proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
Driving your vehicle
45
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, at the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in chapter 7,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsi-
bility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of
any handled devices, other
equipment or vehicle systems
that distract the drive should
not be used during vehicle
operation.
55
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Check sur-
roundings
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause fire.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sud-
den stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driv-
ing drunk.
Driving your vehicle
65
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft (if equipped). The igni-
tion key can be removed only in the
LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position,
turn the key while turning the steer-
ing wheel right and left to release the
tension.
KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP054028K
OYP054029K
57
Driving your vehicle
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
The anti-theft steering column lock (if
equipped) is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the dri-
ver’s seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park) for auto-
matic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these pre-
cautions are not taken.
Starting the engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
WARNING - Ignition
switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
is moving. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots,etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedal.
Driving your vehicle
85
3. Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 sec-
onds), then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle is
still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION - Starter
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-
engaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage
it.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
59
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.
When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the trans-
mitter or the smart key, the light will
go off immediately.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
without depressing the brake pedal
by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP054001K
Not illuminated
Driving your vehicle
105
ACC(Accessory)
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
ON
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
START/RUN
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
If you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without
depressing the brake pedal for auto-
matic transaxle vehicles, the engine
will not start and the ENGINE
START/STOP button changes as fol-
low:
OFF ➔ACC ➔ON ➔OFF or ACC
Amber Redish orange
Not illuminated
511
Driving your vehicle
✽✽ NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON
position for a long time, the battery
will discharge.
Starting the engine with a
smart key
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehicle,
a message "key not in the vehicle"
will appear on the LCD display. And
if all doors are closed, the chime
will sound for 5 seconds. The indi-
cator or warning will turn off while
the vehicle is moving. Always have
the smart key with you.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
Driving your vehicle
125
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 sec-
onds while it is in the ACC posi-
tion. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement. OYP054005K
513
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
✽✽NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OYP054006K
++
++
((
((UU
UUPP
PP))
))
--
--
((
((DD
DDOO
OOWW
WWNN
NN))
))
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
Driving your vehicle
145
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal and the lock release but-
ton when shifting from N (Neutral) to
a forward or reverse gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with the engine
power. Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and pre-
vents the drive wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Do not use
the P position in place of the
parking brake. Always make
sure the shift lever is latched in
the P position and set the park-
ing brake fully. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.The transaxle may be
damaged if you shift into P
(Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
515
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will auto-
matically downshift to the next lower
gear.
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the vehicle” explained in this
section.
OYP054008K
Sports mode
++
++
((
((UU
UUPP
PP))
))
--
--
((
((DD
DDOO
OOWW
WWNN
NN))
))
Driving your vehicle
165
In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
• In sports mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehi-
cle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
517
Driving your vehicle
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. It is a normal condi-
tion.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, then do the following:
1.Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock access hole (1).
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3.Move the shift lever.
4.Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OYP054007N
Driving your vehicle
185
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. Even if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position, the
key also cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with
ENGINE START/STOP button, the
button will not change to the OFF
position unless the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever
from P (Park) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into
P (Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on
a steep hill, the vehicle may have a
tendency to roll backwards.
Shifting the shift lever into 2
(Second Gear) will help prevent
the vehicle from rolling back-
wards.
519
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
cle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
Always test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep water.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
CAUTION - Brake Pedal
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
Driving your vehicle
205
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Parking
brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehi-
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brake wear
Avoid applying the parking
brake to stop the vehicle while it
is moving except in an emer-
gency situation. If you ignore
this audible warning, you will
eventually lose braking per-
formance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION - Replace brake
pads
Do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads. Continuing to
drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
521
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake – Foot type
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
second time while applying the foot
brake. The pedal will automatically
extend to the fully released position.
OYP054009K
OYP054010K
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
WARNING - Parking brake
use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
Driving your vehicle
225
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is nec-
essary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds
in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increase
the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
W-75
523
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
✽✽NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
Driving your vehicle
245
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then your
ABS system is normal. Otherwise,
you may have a problem with the
ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has mal-
functioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
W-78
525
Driving your vehicle
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the condi-
tions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system
designed to help the driver maintain
vehicle control under adverse condi-
tions. It is not a substitute for safe driv-
ing practices. Factors including speed,
road conditions and driver steering
input can all affect whether ESC will be
effective in preventing a loss of control.
It is still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the wheels,
you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensa-
tion in the brake pedal. This is normal
and it means your ESC is active.
✽✽NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is function-
ing properly.
OYP054011K
Driving your vehicle
265
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slip-
pery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
-
527
Driving your vehicle
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only oper-
ates.
If your vehicle is equipped with clus-
ter type B, C, a message also will
appear on the LCD display.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
If your vehicle is equipped with clus-
ter type B, C, a message also will
appear on the LCD display.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operat-
ing normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
■ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
OYP054100N
OYP054101N
■Type B
■Type C OYP054102N
OYP054103N
■Type B
■Type C
Driving your vehicle
285
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
✽✽NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
WARNING - Electronic sta-
bility control
Drive carefully even though
your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control. It can only
assist you in maintaining con-
trol under certain circum-
stances.
WARNING - Tire/
Wheel size
When replacing tires and
wheels, make sure they are the
same size as the original tires
and wheels installed. Driving
with varying tire or wheel sizes
may diminish any supplemental
safety benefits of the VSM sys-
tem.
529
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehi-
cle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detects changes in coeffi-
cient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability manage-
ment is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS). This is only the effect of brake
and EPS control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gra-
dient or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
✽✽NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 22 km/h
(13 mph) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph) when a vehicle is braking
on a split-mu road. The split-mu
road is made of surfaces which
have different friction forces.
Driving your vehicle
305
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving in
clement weather and on a slippery
road.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from rolling back by applying
the brakes automatically for about 2
seconds. The brakes are released
when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
The HAC is activated only for about 2
seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the accel-
erator pedal.
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped
on an incline. While stopped,
make sure you maintain brake
pressure sufficient to prevent
your vehicle from rolling back-
ward and causing an accident.
Don’t release the brake pedal
until you are ready to accelerate
forward.
531
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assis-
tance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effective-
ness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep
the vehicle from rolling.If your vehi-
cle is facing uphill, turn the front
wheels away from the curb to help
keep the vehicle from rolling. If
there is no curb or if it is required
by other conditions to keep the
vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
Driving your vehicle
325
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position.This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal.This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
533
Driving your vehicle
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminated) the cruise
control can be switched on acciden-
tally. Keep the cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a
speed.
Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-
ered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
✽✽NOTICE
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi-
tion.
To set cruise control speed:
1.Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on.The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 40 km/h
(25 mph).
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
OYP054128N
OYP054013K
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
345
3.Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed.The
SET indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operat-
ed in this manner.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operat-
ed in this manner.
OYP054014K
OYP054014KOYP054015K
535
Driving your vehicle
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with the cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 20
km/h (13 mph ).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 30 km/h (20
mph).
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move the
lever up (to RES+). You will return to
your previously preset speed.
OYP054016K
Driving your vehicle
365
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 30
km/h (20 mph):
If any method other than the
CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used
to cancel cruising speed and the sys-
tem is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume
when you move the lever up.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph ).
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want
to resume the cruise control opera-
tion, repeat the steps provided in “To
set cruise control speed” on the pre-
vious page.
OYP054015K
OYP054013K
537
Driving your vehicle
SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (SCC) (IF EQUIPPED)
➀Cruise indicator
➁SET indicator
➂Set speed
➃Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The SCC allows you to program the
vehicle to maintain a set speed so
long as it is not limited by traffic.
When traffic is encountered the vehi-
cle will slow down to maintain a set
distance behind traffic without
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal.
OYP054012K
OYP054129C
WARNING - Smart Cruise
Control Inadvertent
Activation
If the smart cruise control is left
on (CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster illuminat-
ed), it can be activated inadver-
tently. Keep the smart cruise
control system off (CRUISE
indicator light OFF) when the
smart cruise control is not in
use to avoid setting a speed
which the driver is not aware of.
WARNING - Smart Cruise
Control Limitations
• The smart cruise control is a
supplemental system and is
not a substitute for safe driv-
ing practices. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always
check the speed and distance
to the vehicle ahead.
• Do not use the smart cruise
control when it may not be
safe to keep the car at a con-
stant speed, for instance, driv-
ing in heavy or varying traffic,
or on slippery (rainy, icy or
snow-covered) or winding
roads or over 6% up-hill or
down-hill roads.
• The smart cruise control sys-
tem cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians or
an oncoming vehicle. Always
look ahead cautiously to pre-
vent unexpected and sudden
situations from occurring.
• Use the smart cruise control
system only when traveling
on open highways in good
weather conditions.
Driving your vehicle
385
Speed setting (SCC)
To set cruise control speed:
1.Press the CRUISE button, to turn
the system on. The CRUISE indi-
cator light in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
• 30 km/h (20 mph) ~ 180 km/h
(110 mph) : when there is no vehi-
cle in front
• 10 km/h (5 mph) ~ 180 km/h (110
mph) : when there is a vehicle in
front
3.Lever must be moved down (to
SET-) prior to setting any desired
speed. The SET indicator light, set
speed and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance on the LCD screen will illu-
minate.
4.Release the accelerator pedal. The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
increase by 10 km/h (5 mph).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.0 km/h (1
mph) each time you move the lever
up (to RES+) in this manner.
• SCC will operate to a maximum
setting of 180 km/h (110 mph).
However all local speed limit laws
must be followed.
OYP054130N
OYP054131N
OYP054132N
539
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the crusie control
set speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
decrease by 10 km/h (5 mph).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.0 km/h (1
mph) each time you move the lever
down (to SET-) in this manner.
• You can set the cruise control to any
speed above 30 km/h (20 mph).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you move the lever down (to SET-)
at increased speed, the cruising
speed will be set again.
✽✽NOTICE
Be careful when accelerating tem-
porarily, because the speed is not
regulated automatically at this time
even if there is a vehicle in front of
you.
SCC will be temporarily canceled
when:
Cancelled manually
• The brake pedal is depressed.
• Press the CANCEL button.
The SCC turns off temporarily when
the indicator on the LCD display
turns off.
The CRUISE indicator is illuminated
continuously.
OYP054131N OYP054134N
Driving your vehicle
405
Cancelled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The shift lever is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or
P(Parking).
• The vehicle speed is over 190
km/h (120 mph )
• The ESC, ABS or TCS is operat-
ing.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• The engine speed is over 7000
RPM.
• The SCC system has malfunc-
tioned.
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 10 km/h (5
mph).
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than 5
minute.
Each of these actions will cancel
the SCC operation. (the SET indi-
cator, set speed and vehicle to
vehicle distance on the LCD dis-
play will go off.)
In a condition the SCC is cancelled
automatically, the SCC will not
resume even though the RES+ or
SET- lever is moved.
If the SCC is cancelled by other than
the reasons mentioned, have the
system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
If the system is automatically can-
celled, the warning chime will sound
and a message will appear for a few
seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
OYP054135N
541
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruise control set
speed:
If any method other than the
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the cruising speed will
automatically resume when you
move the lever up/down (to RES+ or
SET-).
If you move the lever up (to RES+),
the speed will resume to the recently
set speed.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 10 km/h (5 mph) when
the sensor detects the vehicle ahead
or if the vehicle speed has dropped
below approximately 30 km/h
(20mph) when there is no vehicle in
front of your vehicle.
To turn cruise control off:
Press the CRUISE button. (the
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will go off).
OYP054132N
OYP054130N
WARNING - Cruise
control reactivation
To reduce the risk of an acci-
dent, always check the road
conditions when reactivating
the smart cruise control using
the RES+ lever to ensure the
road conditions permit safe use
of the cruise control.
Driving your vehicle
425
Vehicle to vehicle distance
setting (SCC)
To set vehicle to vehicle distance:
This function allows you to program
the vehicle to maintain relative dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead without
depressing the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal.
The vehicle to vehicle distance will
automatically activate when the SCC
is on.
Select the appropriate distance
according to road conditions and
vehicle speed.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 90 km/h
(56 mph ), the distance is maintained
as follows;
Distance 4 - approximately 52.5 m
(172 feet )
Distance 3 - approximately 40 m
(130 feet )
Distance 2 - approximately 32.5 m
(106 feet )
Distance 1 - approximately 25 m
(82 feet )
✽✽NOTICE
The 'Distance 4' is always set when
the system is used for the first time
after starting the engine.
OYP054136N
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
WARNING - Following
distance
• To avoid collisions, always be
aware of the selected speed
and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance settings when activat-
ing your smart cruise control
system.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
543
Driving your vehicle
• The vehicle will maintain the set
speed, when the lane ahead is
clear.
• The vehicle will slow down or
speed up within selected speed to
maintain the selected distance,
when there is a vehicle ahead of
you in the lane. (A vehicle will
appear in front of your vehicle in
the LCD display only when there is
an actual vehicle in front of you)
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,
your vehicle will travel at a steady
cruising speed after accelerating to
the selected speed.
OYP054137C
Distance 4
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 1
Driving your vehicle
445
• The warning chime sounds and
LCD display blinks if it is hard to
maintain the selected distance to
the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
• Even if the warning chime is not
activated, always pay attention to
the driving conditions to prevent
dangerous situations from occur-
ring. If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed:
less than 30 km/h (20 mph)) moves
to the next lane, the warning chime
will sound and a message will
appear.
If a vehicle enters into your lane
moving less than the designated
speed, you can adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the brake
pedal.
Sensor to detect distance to the
vehicle ahead
The sensor detects distance to the
vehicle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or
other foreign matter, the vehicle to
vehicle distance control may not
operate correctly.
Always keep the sensor clean.
OYP054138N
OYP054140N
545
Driving your vehicle
Sensor malfunction indicator
If the sensor or cover is
dirty or obscured with
foreign matter such as
snow, the indicator will
illuminate. Clean the
sensor by using a soft
cloth.
SCC malfunction indicator
The warning light illumi-
nates when the vehicle
to vehicle distance con-
trol system is not func-
tioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer
and have the system
checked.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• Use only a genuine Kia sensor
cover for your vehicle.
CAUTION
• Do not install accessories
around the sensor and do not
replace the bumper by your-
self. It may interfere with the
sensor performance.
• To prevent sensor cover dam-
age from occurring, wash the
car with a soft cloth.
• Do not damage the sensor or
sensor area by a strong
impact. If the sensor moves
slightly off position, the SCC
will not operate correctly.
If this occurs, have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
Driving your vehicle
465
To adjust the sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control
The sensitivity of vehicle speed
when following the front vehicle to
maintain the set distance can be
adjusted. Go to the User Settings
Mode (Driving Assist) and select
SCC (Smart Cruise Control). You
may select one of the three stages
you prefer.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
• Normal:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is normal
• Fast:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is faster than normal speed.
✽✽NOTICE
The last selected mode is remained
in the system
To convert to cruise control
mode:
The driver may choose to only use
the cruise control mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
OYP054141N
OYP054142N
OYP054168N
547
Driving your vehicle
1.Turn the SCC on (the cruise indi-
cator light will be on but the system
will not be activated).
2.Push the distance to distance
switch for more than 2 seconds.
3.Choose between "Smart cruise
control(SCC) mode" and "Cruise
control(CC) mode".
When using the cruise control mode,
you must manually assess the dis-
tance to other vehicles as the system
will not automatically brake to slow
down for other vehicles.
Limitations of the system
The SCC may have limits to its abili-
ty to detect distance to the vehicle
ahead due to road and traffic condi-
tions.
On curves
• On curves, the SCC may not
detect a moving vehicle in your
lane, and then your vehicle could
accelerate to the set speed. Also,
the vehicle speed will rapidly slow
down when the vehicle ahead is
recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
OYP054143N
Driving your vehicle
485
• Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent
lane. Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition. Apply
the accelerator pedal and select
the appropriate set speed. Check
to be sure that the road conditions
permit safe operation of the SCC.
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the SCC may not detect a moving
vehicle in your lane, and cause
your vehicle to accelerate to the
set speed. Also, the vehicle speed
will rapidly slow down when the
vehicle ahead is recognized sud-
denly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The sensor may not detect imme-
diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is slower than your vehicle,
your speed may decrease to main-
tain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
OYP054144N
OYP054145N OYP054146N
549
Driving your vehicle
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is faster than your vehicle,
your vehicle will accelerate to the
selected speed.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles ahead in your lane
cannot be recognized by the sensor
as follows:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
OYP054147N
OYP054148N
Driving your vehicle
505
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While making turns by steering
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal accord-
ing to the road condition ahead and
driving condition.
• When vehicles are at a standstill
and the vehicle in front of you
changes to the next lane, be care-
ful when your vehicle starts to
move because it may not recog-
nize the stopped vehicle in front of
you.
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
OYP054149N OYP054150N
551
Driving your vehicle
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out to the
back of the vehicle.
OYP054151N
WARNING
• The SCC cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians
or an oncoming vehicle.
Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
• When other vehicles are
changing lanes in front of you
frequently, the SCC may not
detect the vehicle at certain
times. Always look ahead cau-
tiously to prevent unexpected
and sudden situations from
occurring.
WARNING - Smart Cruise
Control Emergency Stops
If an emergency stop is neces-
sary, you must apply the brakes
and not rely on the Smart
Cruise Control.
WARNING - Smart Cruise
Control Following Distance
Keep a safe distance according
to road conditions and vehicle
speed. If the vehicle to vehicle
distance is too close during
high-speed driving, it may
cause a serious collision.
Driving your vehicle
525
- After an engine start, please stop
for several seconds. If system ini-
tialization is not completed, the
SCC does not normally operate.
- After an engine start, if any objects
are not detected or the sensor
cover is obscured with foreign sub-
stances, there is a possibility that
the SCC system may not work.
- Below conditions are not allowed:
over baggage loading in a trunk,
suspension remodeling, tire
replacement with unauthorized
tires or tires with different worn-out
and pressure levels.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
(3) Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to oper-
ate the device.
CAUTION
The SCC may not operate tem-
porarily due to electrical inter-
ference.
553
Driving your vehicle
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi-
ciency by controlling the engine and
transaxle. But fuel-efficiency can be
affected by the driver's driving habits
and road conditions.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn
off the system, press the active
ECO button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, it will
return to the normal mode.
When Active ECO is activated:
• The engine noise may get louder.
• The vehicle speed may slightly be
reduced.
• The air conditioner performance
may be affected.
Limitation of Active ECO oper-
ation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply pressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited,as it has
determined that the driver has
accelerated judging that the driver
wants to speed up.
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM
OYP054017K
Driving your vehicle
545
DRIVE mode
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
❈When normal mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the cluster.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
fuel efficiency by control-
ling certain engine and
transaxle system operat-
ing parameters. Fuel effi-
ciency depends on the
driver's driving habit and
road condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the ECO mode is select-
ed, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to
show that the Active
ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is
activated, it does not
turn off even though the
engine is restarted
again. To turn off the
system, press the
DRIVE MODE button
again.
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced eventhough you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the active eco sys-
tem is activated to improve fuel effi-
ciency.
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP054152N
NORMAL
COMFORT ECO
ECO
555
Driving your vehicle
Limitation of Active ECO operation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
Comfort mode
The steering wheel
becomes lighter. The
comfort mode is usually
used when driving in the
city or when parking the
vehicle.
• For your safety, if you
press the steering mode
button while operating
the steering wheel, but
the steering effort will
not change immediately.
After operating the
steering wheel, the
steering effort will
change automatically to
the selected mode.
• Use caution when
changing the steering
mode while driving.
• When the electronic
power steering is not
operating properly, the
flex steering wheel will
not work.
Driving your vehicle
565
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides and indication
to the driver.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is about 10 km/h
(6 mph) faster than the other vehi-
cle, the system will not warn you.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
When a vehicle approaches you
at high speed, the system will
warn you.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves rear-
ward, the sensor detects the
approaching vehicle in the left
and right side, the system will
warn you.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP054022K
WARNING - BSD
Limitations
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system. Do not solely rely
on the system but always pay
attention to drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle
and is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane chang-
ing procedures. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes.
Blind spot area
Closing at high speed
557
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) switch is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
If vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h
(18.6 mph), the system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF
and ON the system returns to the
previous state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on.
2.Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h
(18.6 mph ).
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side.
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
OYP054018K
Driving your vehicle
585
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
If the detected vehicle is not in
detecting range, the warning will turn
off according to driving conditions.
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror and a alarm
will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
the original position, the second
stage alert will be deactivated.
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
OYP054023K OYP054024K
OYP054025K
1st stage 2nd stage
559
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
The message will appear to notify
the driver there are foreign sub-
stances on the rear bumper or it is
hot near the rear bumper. The light
on the switch and the system will
turn off automatically.
Remove the foreign substance on
the rear bumper.
After the foreign substance is
removed, if you drive for approxi-
mately 10 minutes, the system will
work normally.
This warning message may lit up in
rural areas with little traffic or open
terrains such as wide expanse of
desert. Additionally, heavy snow or
rain may trigger the warning mes-
sage.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign substance is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.The
system will turn off automatically.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OYP054104N
OYP054105N
OYP054106N
OYP054107N
■Type B
■Type C
■Type B
■Type C
Driving your vehicle
605
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
Operating conditions
• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) in "User Settings" under
"Driving Assist" on the instrument
cluster. The system will turn on and
standby to activate.
• Select RCTA again, to turn the sys-
tem off.
• If the vehicle is turned off and on
again, the RCTA system will return
to the state right before the vehicle
was turned off. Always turn the
RCTA system off when not in use.
• The system operates when the
vehicle speed is below 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is 0.5m ~
20m based on the side direction. If
the approaching vehicle speed is
4 km/h (2.5 mph) ~ 36 km/h (22
mph) within sensing range, it is
detected. However, the system
sensing range is different base on
conditions. Always pay attention to
the surrounding.
OYP054026K
OYP054108N
OYP054109N
■Type B
■Type C
561
Driving your vehicle
Warning type
• If the vehicle detected by sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound and the warn-
ing light will blink on the outside
rearview mirror.
• If the detected vehicle is out of the
sensing range of your vehicle,
move the vehicle away from the
detected object slowly; the warning
will be cancelled.
• The system may not operate prop-
erly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surrounding.
❈If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing abili-
ty may be deteriorated.
OYP054027K
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
CAUTION
• The system may not work
properly if the bumper has
been replaced or if a repair
work has been done near the
sensor.
• The detection area differs
according to the roads width.
If the road is narrow the sys-
tem may detect other vehicles
in the next lane.
• On the contrary, if the road is
very wide the system may not
detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due
to strong electromagnetic
waves.
Driving your vehicle
625
Non-operating condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor is
polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or hidden with a foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle shows
much change such as when the
trunk is loaded with heavy objects,
abnormal tire pressure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, etc.
- A lot of amount of metal sub-
stances are near the vehicles such
as a construction area.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer like vehicle is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to it
and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes by
very fast.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle drives at
the rear very nearby or drives very
close.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When the temperature of rear
bumper is high.
- When the sensors are covered by
the vehicle, wall and pillar of park-
ing lot.
- When your vehicle moves back, if
the detected vehicle also moves
back.
- If there is small things like shopping
cart and baby carriage.
- If there is a vehicle with decreased
ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to anoth-
er vehicle.
563
Driving your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is severely polluted
- The window is severely polluted
- The windows are severely tinted.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Driving your vehicle
645
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
This system detects the lane with a
sensor at the front windshield and
notifies you if it detects that your
vehicle leaves the lane.
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the dri-
ver's responsibility to always check
the road conditions.
• If the sensor cannot detect the lane
or if the vehicle speed does not
exceed 70 km/h (44 mph), the
LDWS will not be able to notify you
if the vehicle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
• Prevent damage to the LDWS sen-
sor from water or any liquid.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts
and do not damage the sensor by
a strong impact.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
on the dash board.
• The operation of the LDWS can be
affected by several factors (includ-
ing environmental conditions). It is
the responsibility of the driver to
pay attention to the roadway and to
maintain the vehicle in it's lane at
all times.
OYP054020K
OYP054021K
OYP054019K
WARNING - LDWS Alert
The LDWS is only intended to
provide you with information
regarding your vehicle's posi-
tion on the roadway. Upon
receiving an LDWS alert, you
must take the necessary steps
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle.The LDWS does not provide
any steering inputs into the
vehicle for you. It can be dan-
gerous to make a large sudden
steering input in response to an
alert, since that could result in
loss of control.
565
Driving your vehicle
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button
in the ON position. The indicator
(green) illuminates on the cluster. To
cancel the LDWS, press the button
again.
If the system detects that your vehi-
cle is leaving the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 70 km/h (44 mph),
the warning operates as follows:
1.Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you
leave on the LCD display blinks yel-
low.
2.Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates.
OYP054127N
OYP054110N
OYP054111N
OYP054112N
OYP054113N
■Lane departure warning (Right)
■When the sensor detects the lane line ■Lane departure warning (Left)
■When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
Driving your vehicle
665
Warning indicator
When the LDWS is not working prop-
erly, the warning light will illuminate
and the warning message will come
on for a few second. After the mes-
sage disappears, the master warning
light will illuminate.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
or the hazard warning flasher to
change lane.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽✽NOTICE
To change lanes, operate the turn
signal switch then change the lane.
The LDWS may not warn you
even if the vehicle leaves the
lane, or may warn you even if
the vehicle does not leave the
lane when;
• The lane can't be visible due to
snow, rain, stain, a puddle or other
environmental conditions.
• The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly such as tunnel
enter/exit.
• The headlights are off at night or in
a tunnel.
• The color of the lane marking from
the road is difficult to distinguish.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light such as street light, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle light reflects
from water on the road.
• The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
OYP054114N
OYP054119K
■Warning message
■Master warning light
WARNING - LDWS
Limitations
The Lane Departure Warning
System is a supplemental sys-
tem. Do not solely rely on the
system but always pay attention
and drive safely.
567
Driving your vehicle
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to a direct ray of light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indis-
tinct.
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• The sensor cannot distinguish the
lane from the road due to the dust.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane line.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
road conditions.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane lines are
crossing.
• Putting something on the dash-
board.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• The lane line is more than two in
either side (Left/Right)
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Driving your vehicle
685
The Foward Collision Warning
System helps avoid accidents by
identifying critical situations early
and warning the driver.
FCWS Operation
To operate:
Go to the User Settings Mode
(Driving Assist) and select FCW
(Forward Collision Warning) on the
LCD display (For more details,
refer to "LCD Display" in chapter
4.).
The system will turn on and standby
to activate. The system will activate
when vehicle speed is above 40
km/h (25 mph) and below 145 km/h
(90 mph ).
FCWS will default ON when vehicle
is restarted even though FCWS was
turned off on User Settings Mode.
FOWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OYP054115N
OYP054116N
■Type B
■Type C
569
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
A warning message and chime will
be provided when rapidly approach-
ing a slower moving, braking or
stopped vehicle ahead.
Immediately reduce your speed to
prevent a collision.
✽✽NOTICE
The maximum warning speed for a
stopped vehicle is 85 km/h (53 mph).
FCWS malfunction message
When the FCWS is not working
properly, the warning message will
come on for a few second. After the
message disappears, the master
warning light will illuminate.
OYP054117N
WARNING - Forward
Collision Warning System
Limitations
• The Forward Collision
Warning System is a supple-
mental system to assist you
and its effects may differ
according to road and driving
conditions. Do not solely rely
on the system and always pay
attention to prevent danger-
ous situations from occur-
ring.
• FCWS is a warning system
and does not apply the brakes
automatically in a near crash
situation. FCWS may not pro-
vide a warning with enough
time to help avoid a crash.
FCWS does not detect pedes-
trians, animals, signs, con-
struction or other objects. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to pay attention to the road-
way to prevent collisions.
OYP054118N
OYP054119K
■Warning message
■ Master warning light
Driving your vehicle
705
Limitations of the System
The Forward Collision Warning
System may have limits to its ability
to detect distance to the vehicle
ahead due to road and traffic condi-
tions.
The FCW could not detect vehicle or
could detect objects as vehicles
when :
- The camera lens is covered with
dirt.
- There is heavy rain or heavy snow.
- Driving on a curve.
- Driving uphill or downhill.
- An object ahead is very narrow
such as motorcycles or bicycles.
- A vehicle suddenly cut in on your
lane.
- The front vehicle suddenly departs
from the lane or it is hidden by other
objects.
- A vehicle passes by at a higher rate
of speed.
- An unusual shape vehicle is ahead
such as a trailer, special access
vehicles or a truck with unique
shaped cargo.
- The rear lamps of the vehicle
ahead is missing, installed on an
unusual place or installed unevenly.
- The front vehicle has a separate
lamp or LED lamp at the rear of the
vehicle.
- Pass through a tunnel where the
difference of intensity of illumina-
tion is high.
- Driving with the sun in front of you.
- The approaching vehicle turns high
beam on.
- The vehicle violently vibrates due to
road conditions.
- The vehicle is tilted from a flat tire
or being towed.
- The vehicle ahead is not distin-
guishable due to multiple or repeat-
ed shape lamps.
- The vehicle ahead is not distin-
guishable due to objects that can
be mistaken for a vehicle.
- The surrounding environments
such as shadow or markers on a
road, etc. could be mistaken as a
vehicle.
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
571
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel.To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see sec-
tion 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Driving your vehicle
725
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
WARNING - Engine off
during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steer-
ing wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.
573
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-
slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehi-
cle is defined as a Crossover Utility
Vehicle (CUV). CUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of per-
forming in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design charac-
teristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports vehi-
cles are designed to perform satis-
factorily in off-road conditions. Due to
this risk, driver and passengers are
strongly recommended to buckle
their seat belts. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt.There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an auto-
matic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.
Driving your vehicle
745
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transaxle. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possi-
ble damage to the transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
575
Driving your vehicle
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. (On vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature.) Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
OYP054153N OYP054154N
Driving your vehicle
765
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
OYP054155N
577
Driving your vehicle
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
WARNING - Under/over
inflated tires
Always check the tires for proper
inflation before driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
For proper tire pressures, refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible. For further information
and tread limits, refer to "Tires
and wheels" in section 7.
Driving your vehicle
785
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
on your tires. If snow tires are need-
ed, it is necessary to select tires
equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid accel-
eration, sudden brake applications,
and sharp turns are potentially very
hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur. You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front of your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
579
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high qual-
ity ethylene glycol coolant in the cool-
ing system. It is the only type of coolant
that should be used because it helps
prevent corrosion in the cooling sys-
tem, lubricates the water pump and
prevents freezing. Be sure to replace
or replenish your coolant in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule
in section 7. Before winter, have your
coolant tested to assure that its freez-
ing point is sufficient for the tempera-
tures anticipated during the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni-
tion system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint finish.
Driving your vehicle
805
Don’t let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear shift lever in P
(Park, automatic transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components are not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flash-
light, emergency flares, sand, shov-
el, jumper cables, window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan-
ket, etc.
581
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering towing with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your country's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine their
legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for
towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask
an authorized Kia dealer for further
details before towing.
You may require an additional wiring
harness connector to install a trailer
hitch. Please contact an authorized
Kia dealer for more details.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer.* To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in han-
dling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
This section contains many time-
tested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
blies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This addi-
tional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
TRAILER TOWING
CAUTION - Trailer
installation
Follow instructions in this sec-
tion when pulling a trailer.
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.
WARNING - Towing a
trailer
Always check your towing
equipment to confirm correct
equipment size and installation
before use. Using incompatible
or incorrectly installed trailer
equipment can effect the vehi-
cle operation and endanger you
and your passengers.
WARNING - Weight
limits
Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW (gross
combination weight), GVW
(gross vehicle weight), GAW
(gross axle weight) and trailer
tongue load are all within the
limits.
Driving your vehicle
825
Hitches
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly car-
bon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle,
as well as dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• Kia trailer hitch accessory is avail-
able at an authorized Kia dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trail-
er. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
mendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trail-
er. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
ing system, make sure it conforms to
your state’s regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating cor-
rectly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the
maximum allowed weight without
trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
require its own brakes as well. Be
sure to read and follow the instruc-
tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• Don’t tap into or modify your vehi-
cle's brake system.
WARNING - Trailer
brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system.This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent
trailer shop for this work.
583
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint your-
self with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now a
good deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by
itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working.This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail-
er. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane. Due to the added load to the
engine when going uphill the vehicle
may also take longer to pass than it
would on flat ground.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just move your
hand to the left. To move the trailer to
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects near the edge of the
road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-
vers. Signal well in advance before
turning or lane changes.
Driving your vehicle
845
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you dis-
connect and then reconnect the
wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized Kia dealer can assist
you in installing the wiring harness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trail-
er brakes and you have an automat-
ic transaxle, you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
CAUTION
Always use an approved trailer
wiring harness. Failure to use
an approved trailer wiring har-
ness could result in damage to
the vehicle electrical system.
585
Driving your vehicle
Towing up hill
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay close
attention to the engine coolant
temperature gauge to ensure the
engine does not overheat.
If the needle of the coolant temper-
ature gauge moves across the dial
towards “H” (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as it is safe to do so,
and allow the engine to idle until it
cools down.You may proceed once
the engine has cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibil-
ity of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill. People
can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged if they unexpected-
ly roll downhill.
However, if you ever have to park
your trailer on a hill, here's how to do
it:
1.Pull the vehicle into the parking
space. Turn the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb (right if
headed downhill, left if headed up
hill).
2.If the vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, place the vehicle in P
(Park).
3.Set the parking brake and shut off
the engine.
4.Place chocks under the trailer
wheels on the down hill side of the
wheels.
5.Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6.Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7.Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the park-
ing brake set.
Driving your vehicle
865
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer tow-
ing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, auto-
matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake con-
dition is another important item to
frequently check. Each item is cov-
ered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you
start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
nance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
• When towing check transaxle fluid
more frequently.
CAUTION - Air condition
Do not use the A/C while using
your vehicle to tow uphill. Due
to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
on hot days or during uphill
driving.
587
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trail-
er
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• Do not do any towing with your
vehicle during its first 2,000 km
(1,200 miles) in order to allow the
engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in
serious engine or transaxle dam-
age.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized Kia dealer
for further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit,
etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph )).
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important con-
siderations that have to do with
weight:
Engine
Item
Gasoline Engine
Lambda 3.3 GDI
Maximum trailer
weight (kg (lbs.))
Without brake
system 453 (1,000)
With brake system 1,587 (3,500)
Maximum tongue weight (kg (lbs.)) 158 (350)
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this sec-
tion.
Driving your vehicle
885
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use
your trailer. For example, speed, alti-
tude, road grades, outside tempera-
ture and how often your vehicle is
used to pull a trailer are all important.
The ideal trailer weight can also
depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-
cle. This weight includes the curb
weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who
will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight, within the limits of the
maximum permissible trailer tongue
load. After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by mov-
ing some items around in the trailer.
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
WARNING - Trailer
Always follow the loading
instructions provided with your
trailer. Improper loading can
effect vehicle operation and
result in an accident.
589
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.
OYP054156N/OYP054157N/OYP054158N/OYP054159N/OYP054160N/OYP054161N
Tire and loading information label
Driving your vehicle
905
Vehicle capacity weight:
7 persons : 525 kg (1,158 lbs.)
8 persons : 600 kg (1,323 lbs.)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total - 7 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 5 persons)
- 8 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 6 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
3.3L Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
With trailer brakes
: 1,587 kg (3,500 lbs)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
591
Driving your vehicle
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1.Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-
ard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1400 lbs.) and there will be five
68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (650 lbs).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
Driving your vehicle
925
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 136 kg
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 (300 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
499 kg
Luggage weight (1100 lbs)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 340 kg
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 (750 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
295 kg
Luggage weight (650 lbs)
ABC
Example 2
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 390 kg
78 kg (172 lbs) × 5 (860 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
245 kg
Luggage weight (540 lbs)
ABC
Example 3
593
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
Driving your vehicle
945
✽✽NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sud-
den stop or crash.
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehi-
cle's tires and possible tire fail-
ure, increased stopping dis-
tances and poor vehicle han-
dling all of which may result in a
crash.
595
Driving your vehicle
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the certification
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
• Removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Storing the spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
• Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
facia panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
OYP064001N
OYP064014K
■Type A
■Type B
63
What to do in an emergency
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (Park).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If the engine stalls while driv-
ing
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
✽✽NOTICE
If there was a check engine light and
loss of power or stall and if safe to do
so to wait at least 10 seconds to
restart the vehicle after it stalls. This
may reset the car so it will no longer
run at low power (limp home) condi-
tion.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check the fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connec-
tors at the ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
WARNING - Push/
pull start
If the engine will not start, do
not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other dam-
age. In addition, push or pull
starting may cause the catalytic
converter to overload and cre-
ate a fire hazard.
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION - Push/pull start
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode.
1VQA4001
Discharged
battery
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
When jump starting your vehi-
cle be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corro-
sive.
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
come in contact.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal of the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to a solid, sta-
tionary, metallic point (for example,
the engine lifting bracket) away
from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat-
tery when making connections.
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle lock system cannot be
push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
WARNING - Battery
cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to over-
heat and crack, releasing bat-
tery acid.
67
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine will probably be
too hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P (Park,
automatic transaxle) and set the
parking brake. If the air condition-
ing is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cool-
ing fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leak-
ing from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air condi-
tioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized Kia
dealer for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This
may result in coolant being
blown out of the opening and
cause serious burns.
What to do in an emergency
86
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The jack and wheel lug nut wrench
are stored in the luggage compart-
ment.
Remove the panel indicated in the
illustration.
(1) Jack
(2) Wheel lug nut wrench (Jack handle)
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
• Always move the vehicle complete-
ly off the road and onto the shoul-
der before trying to change a tire.
The jack should be used on a firm
level ground. If you cannot find a
firm, level place off the road, call a
towing service company for assis-
tance.
• Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehi-
cle; never use the bumpers or any
other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present
are in a secure place away from
the road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.
WARNING - Changing
tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
OYP064029N
WARNING - Tire Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.
69
What to do in an emergency
Removing the spare tire
Your spare tire is stored underneath
your vehicle, directly below the right
sliding door.
1. Open the right sliding door and
find the plastic hex bolt cover on
the floor.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
loosen the bolt enough to lower
the spare tire.
Turn the wrench counterclockwise
until the spare tire reaches the
ground.
OYP054167N
OYP054163N
WARNING
- Running vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
What to do in an emergency
106
4. After the spare tire reaches the
ground, continue to turn the
wrench counterclockwise, and
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, oth-
erwise the spare tire carrier may
be damaged.
5. Remove the retainer from the cen-
ter of the spare tire.
6. Remove the cover from the spare
tire.
Storing the spare tire
1. Assemble the cover and spare tire
with valve center aligning together.
2. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing down.
2. Place the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer through the
wheel center.
3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it
clicks.
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center of
the spare tire to prevent the spare
tire from "rattling".
Otherwise, it may cause the spare
tire to fall off the carrier and lead to
an accident.
OYP054164N
OYP054165N
OYP054166N
611
What to do in an emergency
Changing tires
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park) with automatic transaxle.
3.Activate the hazard warning flash-
ers.
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, and spare tire from the vehi-
cle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
from the jack position.
• To prevent vehicle movement while
changing a tire, always set the
parking brake fully, and always
block the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the wheel being changed.
• We recommend that the wheels of
the vehicle be blocked, and that no
person remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OYP064030N
1VQA4022
What to do in an emergency
126
6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-
clockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7.Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place the
jack at the designated locations
under the frame. The jacking posi-
tions are plates welded to the
frame with two tabs and a raised
dot to index with the jack.
8.Insert the wheel lug nut wrench
into the jack and turn it clockwise,
raising the vehicle until the tire just
clears the ground. This measure-
ment is approximately 30 mm
(1 in.).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
OYP064023N/Q
OYP064022N
OYP064028N OYP064021N
613
What to do in an emergency
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so
it cannot roll away. To put the wheel
on the hub, pick up the spare tire,
line up the holes with the studs and
slide the wheel onto them. If this is
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and
get the top hole in the wheel lined
up with the top stud.Then jiggle the
wheel back and forth until the
wheel can slide over the other
studs.
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid possi-
ble severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that there
is nothing on the hub or wheel (such
as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that pre-
vents the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Insert the wrench into the jack
and lower the vehicle to the
ground by turning the wheel nut
wrench counterclockwise.
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
146
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
wheels, have an authorized Kia deal-
er tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, dust and dirt may get
into the tire valve and air may leak
from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
buy another and install it as soon as
possible.
After you have changed the wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations. Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Reusing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
OYP064031N
615
What to do in an emergency
To prevent the jack, wheel lug nut
wrench and spare tire from rattling
while the vehicle is in motion, store
them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽✽NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
80 km/h (50 mph). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible to
avoid failure of the spare possi-
bly leading to personal injury or
death.
What to do in an emergency
166
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic vehicle wash while the
compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle com-
ponents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
617
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Move the shift lever to the P posi-
tion on vehicles with automatic
transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064001
OHYK064005
OHYK064002
• Type A
■Example
• Type B
• Type C
❈The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
What to do in an emergency
186
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to “Trailer towing” in sec-
tion 5.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
OYP064024N
dolly
dolly
WARNING - Side and
curtain Air bag
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignitions
is ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a
rollover.
619
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook (front)
(if equipped)
1.Remove the towing hook from the
tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front bumper.
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
OYP064026N
OYP044260N
OYP064009K
What to do in an emergency
206
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a com-
mercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle other
than the tow hooks for towing may
damage the body of your vehicle.
• Only use a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the cable
or chain to the towing hook provid-
ed.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it
steadily and with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
OYP064010K
OYP064011K
Front
Rear
621
What to do in an emergency
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loose during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than usual since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neutral.
Be sure the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in the
ACC position. A driver must be in
the towed vehicle to operate the
steering and brakes.
OYP064025N
CAUTION
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transaxle, limit
the vehicle speed to 15 km/h
(10 mph) and drive less than
1.5 km (1 mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle for fluid leaks
under your vehicle. If the auto-
matic transaxle fluid is leak-
ing, a flatbed equipment or
towing dolly must be used.
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-26
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Checking the power steering fluid level . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Checking the power steering hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Filter inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-49
• Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
• Inner panel fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
• Front light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
• Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
• Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-80
• High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
• Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
7
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OYP074061N
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
3. Radiator cap
4. Fuse box
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Engine oil dipstick
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Battery terminal
9. Air cleaner
10. Power steering fluid reservoir*
* if equipped
■■3.3L GDI
* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Maintenance
47
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factory
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle proper-
ly. For expert advice and quality serv-
ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives tech-
nical support from Kia in order to pro-
vide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
75
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems.This chapter gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this chapter,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with spe-
cial tools.
✽✽NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the engine
while working under the hood,
make certain that you remove
all jewelry (especially rings,
bracelets, watches, and neck-
laces) and all neckties, scarves,
and similar loose clothing
before getting near the engine
or cooling fans.
Maintenance
67
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure.
77
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
checks, and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate the automat-
ic transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Maintenance
87
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the follow-
ing conditions apply, follow the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 32°C (90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 240,000 km (150,000
miles) continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-
quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*2: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this mainte-
nance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-
ized Kia dealer for details.
*3: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
*4: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 18 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter*2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 30 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses(if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
(Continued)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 36 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 42 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
147
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter*2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter*2
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect valve clearance *3
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect drive belts*3
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after that,
every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
715
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 54 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 60 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect drive belts *3
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after that,
every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
Maintenance
167
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 66 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 72 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter *2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect drive belts *3
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after that,
every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
187
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 84 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect drive belts *3
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after that,
every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 78 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
719
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 90 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
207
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace coolant
(First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months after
that, every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 96 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter *2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect valve clearance *3
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect drive belts *3
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after that,
every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
(Continued)
721
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 102 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 108 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect drive belts *3
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after that,
every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
Maintenance
227
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 114 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
723
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
No check, No service required
❑Automatic transaxle fluid
240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 120 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust system
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter *2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑Inspect parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑Inspect drive belts *3
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after that,
every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Inspect power steering fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace coolant
(First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months after
that, every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
247
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING
CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER REVERY 6,000 KM (3,750 MILES)
OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER RMORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS RMORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID REVERY 96,000 KM (60,000 MILES) A, C, E, F, G, I
FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS AND
CALIPERS IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
725
Maintenance
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km
(5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km
(10 miles) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long
distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or
salt- spread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materi-
als or in very cold weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or
vehicle towing
J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING
CONDITION
REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, F, G
PARKING BRAKE IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &
BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT AND
UPPER ARM BALL JOINT IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS IEVERY 12,000 KM (7,500 MILES)
OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G, H, I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR
EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) RMORE FREQUENTLY C, E
Maintenance
267
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
Fuel filters should be installed by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
727
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Maintenance
287
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid does not
need to be checked under normal
usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the begin-
ning of this chapter.
✽✽NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
This a normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction
and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in chapter 8.)
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal or
lever and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
729
Maintenance
Exhaust system
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses (if equipped)
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately. Inspect the power
steering belt (or drive belt) for evi-
dence of cuts, cracks, excessive
wear, oiliness and proper tension.
Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Maintenance
307
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 8.)
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - Replacing
engine oil
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine
oil. If you drop the engine oil
on the engine room, wipe it off
immediately.
OYP074062N
OYP074045N
731
Maintenance
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as
soon as possible after handling
used oil.
Maintenance
327
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level • Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the cool-
ing system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise
to remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operating,
do not remove the radiator cap or
the drain plug while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal injury
from escaping hot coolant or
steam.
733
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protec-
tion against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F, but do not over-
fill. If frequent additions are required,
see an authorized Kia dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
OYP074046K
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed. it may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.
Maintenance
347
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table. Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such as
the alternator.
OYP074066N
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F)
35 65
-25°C (-13°F)
40 60
-35°C (-31°F)
50 50
-45°C (-49°F)
60 40
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure which may result in
serious injury.
735
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX (Maximum) and MIN
(Minimum) marks on the side of the
reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX (Maximum) level. The level will
fall with accumulated mileage.This is
a normal condition associated with
the wear of brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
or capacities” in chapter 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
Brake fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly.
OYP074048K
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the
brake system.
CAUTION - Brake fluid
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
Maintenance
367
POWER STEERING FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the power steering
fluid level
With the vehicle on level ground,
check the fluid level in the power
steering reservoir periodically. The
fluid should be between MAX and
MIN marks on the side of the reser-
voir at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid,
thoroughly clean the area around the
reservoir cap to prevent power steer-
ing fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level.
In the event the power steering sys-
tem requires frequent addition of
fluid, the vehicle should be inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate the
vehicle for prolonged periods with
a low power steering fluid level.
• Never start the engine when the
reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the tank.
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort and/or
noise from the power steering sys-
tem.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of
the power steering system and
cause damage to it.
Use only the specified power steer-
ing fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
lubricants or capacities" in chapter
8.)
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks,
damage and twists in the power
steering hose before driving.
OYP074063N
737
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 30 kg (66 lb,
294 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Stroke : 8~9 notch
OYP074049K
OYP054009K
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING - Flammable
Fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks.The windshield
washer fluid reservoir is flamma-
ble under certain circumstances.
This can result in a fire.
Maintenance
387
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
1. Lift up and open the air cleaner
cover(1).
2. Rotate the locking lever(2) down-
ward.
3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner
box. Be careful dust or dirt does
not enter the air intake, or damage
may result.
4. Replace the air cleaner filter.
5. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
AIR CLEANER
OYP074040K
OYP074041K
OYP074042K
OYP074043K
739
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this chapter.)
CAUTION - Air filter main-
tenance
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
Maintenance
407
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the mainte-
nance schedule. If the vehicle is
operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components. 1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap (1). 2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
OYP074005KOYP074006K
741
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out right side of
the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
OYP074007K OYP074008K
Maintenance
427
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic vehicle washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial vehicle washes. If the blades are
not wiping properly, clean both the
window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122 CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
743
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
1LDA5023
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
OHM078059
Maintenance
447
2. Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift
up the blade clip.
3. Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
4. Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
OHM078062
OSBL071001
OSBL071003
OSBL071002
745
Maintenance
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized Kia dealer replace the
wiper blade.
OHM078063
Maintenance
467
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention imme-
diately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
Never attempt to recharge the bat-
tery when the battery cables are con-
nected.
OYP074064N
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID and
electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
747
Maintenance
✽✽NOTICE
If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the bat-
tery may be discharged. Never use
unauthorized devices.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
WARNING - Risk of elec-
trocution
Never touch the electrical igni-
tion system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
"zap" you.
Maintenance
487
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See chapter 4)
• Sunroof (See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Clock (See chapter 4)
• Audio (See chapter 4)
749
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km(one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
OYP084005N
WARNING - Tire under
inflation
Inflate your tire consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe under inflation
can lead to severe heat build-
up, causing blowouts, tread
separation and other tire fail-
ures that can result in the loss
of vehicle control. This risk is
much higher on hot days and
when driving for long periods at
high speeds.
Maintenance
507
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater pos-
sibility of damage from road haz-
ards.
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than 1.6
km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
sure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
751
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pres-
sure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle con-
trol, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
Maintenance
527
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
WARNING - Mixing tires
• Do not use the compact spare
tire (if equipped) for tire rota-
tion.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics.
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
753
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. The tire size
affects wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehi-
cle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) to work irregularly.
✽✽ NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same originally sup-
plied with the vehicles. If not, that
affects driving performance.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
CAUTION - Wheels
Wheels that do not meet Kia
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
Maintenance
547
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra-
tion, headlight aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
I030B04JM
1
1
23
4
5,6
7
755
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your vehicle. The fol-
lowing explains what the letters and
numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P235/65R17 108T
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s chapter
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
108 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this chapter
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
Maintenance
567
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicle tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2015.
4.Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recom-
mended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
757
Maintenance
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum chapter width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recom-
mend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Maintenance
587
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air con-
ditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
759
Maintenance
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
Maintenance
607
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automo-
tive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5
lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previ-
ously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear bars,"
that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
761
Maintenance
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your vehicle with snow
tires, they should be the same size
and have the same load capacity as
the original tires. Snow tires should
be installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa
(4 psi) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75
mph) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is: Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Maintenance
627
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this chap-
ter to achieve the tread life potential
of these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
763
Maintenance
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
Maintenance
647
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
OYP074073N
Normal
Normal
■Blade type
■Cartridge type
■Multi fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or
add-on electric wiring of the
vehicle.
765
Maintenance
✽✽NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ depending on equip-
ment/options.
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
on the engine compartment fuse
panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
OYP074009K
OYP074010K
Maintenance
667
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the power outlet
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly. When the switch is
Off, the caution will be displayed on
the instrument cluster.
Always place the fuse switch in the
ON position while driving the vehicle.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up.
When the blade type fuse is dis-
connected, remove it by using the
clip designed for changing fuses
located in the engine room fuse
box. Upon removal, securely
insert reserve fuse of equal quan-
tity.
OYP074011K
OYP074012N
767
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
CAUTION - Fuse panel
covers
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water contact.
OYP074052N
Maintenance
687
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽✽NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OYP074014K
OYP075015N
769
Maintenance
Inner fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
ECU 10A PCM, Injector Drive Box, Smart Key Control Module/Immobilizer Module
MODULE4 7.5A
Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, Multipurpose Check Connector, Bezel Switch, MTS
Module, Electro Chromic, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, A/C Control Module, Heater Control Module,
Passenger Ventilation Seat Control Module, Driver IMS Control Module, Rear Seat Heater Control
Module, Auto Head Leveling Device Module, ATM Shift Lever ILL.
MODULE3 10A LDWS Module, Stop Lamp, Front Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Front Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH
(CENTER), Rear Parking Assist Buzzer, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist
Sensor LH/RH (CENTER), Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH
MODULE5 7.5A Rear Seat Heater Control Module, AC Inverter Unit, Heater Control Module, Passenger Ventilation Seat
Control Module, Portable Lamp, Around View Unit
MODULE6 7.5A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Motor, Wiper RR Relay
CLUSTER 7.5A Instrument Cluster
A/CON1 7.5A A/C Control Module, Ionizer, Rear A/C Control Switch, PCB Block (Blower Relay, Blower RR Relay)
MEMORY2 10A Data Link Connector, Instrument Cluster, Digital Clock, A/C Control Module, BCM, Power Sliding Door
Module, Driver Door Module, Passenger Safety Power Window Switch, Driver IMS Control Module
SMART KEY3 10A Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module
POWER OUTLET2 20A Console Power Outlet
A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster, Digital Clock, A/C Control Module(Auto)
WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch, BCM
HEATED STEERING 15A Clock Spring (Steering Wheel Switch)
MEMORY1 10A Clock Spring (Steering Wheel Switch)
SMART KEY1 25A Smart Key Control Module
POWER OUTLET3 20A Rear Power Outlet
MODULE2 7.5A BCM, Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module
Maintenance
707
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MULTIMEDIA 15A USB Charger #1/#2, MTS Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
S/ROOF FRT 20A Front Sunroof Motor
AMP 25A AMP
IG1 20A PCB BLOCK (Fuse - ABS3, TCU, MDPS, CRUISE)
SMART KEY2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module
INTERIOR LAMP 10A Portable Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Cargo Lamp, Front Vinity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Glove Box
Lamp, Key Warning Switch
START 7.5A With IMMO./Smart Key : Transmission Range Switch, W/O IMMO. : PCB Block (B/Alarm Relay)
S/ROOF RR 25A Rear Sunroof Motor
DOOR LOCK 20A Tail Gate Relay, Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Sliding Door Lock/Unlock Relay
FOG LAMP REAR 10A -
MODULE1 10A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Around View Unit, BCM, Overhead Console Lamp, MTS Module,
Digital Clock, USB Charger #1/#2
AIR BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor
A/CON2 7.5A A/C Control Module, Blower Resistor (Manual)
HEATED MIRROR 10A Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
P/WINDOW
LH 25A Driver Safety Window Module, Driver Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch LH, Rear Safety Power
Window Switch LH, Rear Safety Power Window Module LH
MODULE7 7.5A Key Inter Lock Solenoid, Fuel Lid Switch, ATM Lever Switch, Rear A/C Control Switch, Electro Chromic
Mirror
POWER OUTLET1 20A Front Power Outlet
P/SEAT (DRV) 30A Driver Manual Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch, Driver IMS Control Module
P/WINDOW
RH 25A Passenger Safety Window Module, Passenger Power Window Motor, Passenger Door Module, Rear
Power Window Switch RH, Rear Safety Power Window Switch RH, Rear Safety Power Window Module
RH
S/HEATER FRT 20A Heater Control Module, Passenger Ventilation Seat Control Module
771
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
OYP074053K
OYP074034N
Maintenance
727
Engine compartment fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
ABS1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS2 40A ESC Module
INVERTER 30A AC Inverter Unit
IDB 15A Injector Drive Box
S/HEATER RR 25A Rear Seat Heater Control Module
FOG LAMP FRONT 15A Fog Lamp Front Relay
P/SEAT (PASS) 30A Passenger Manual Switch
COOLING FAN1 60A Cooling Fna1 Relay
COOLING FAN2 50A Cooling Fna2 Relay
B+4 50A Smart Junction Block (IPS Control Module, IPS3, IPS4, IPS5, IPS6, Fuse - MODULE7)
POWER TAIL GATE 40A Power Tail Gate Module
B+2 50A Smart Junction Block (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse - P/SEAT DRV, P/WDW RH)
IG1 40A With Smart Key : PDM1/2 Relay, W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch
IG2 40A Start Relay, With Smart Key : PDM3 Relay, W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch,
B+1 50A Smart Junction Block (IPS Control Module, Fuse - P/WDW LH, S/HEATER FRT, DR LOCK)
TRAILER 30A Trailer Power Outlet
B+5 50A Smart Junction Block (Motor Driver, Power Outlet Relay, Fuse - S/ROOF FRT, S/ROOF RR, BRAKE
SWITCH, SMART KEY1, SMART KEY3, AMP)
PSD1 40A Power Sliding Door Module
PSD2 40A Power Sliding Door Module
B+3 50A Smart Junction Block (IPS Control Module, IPS1, IPS2)
MDPS 125A MDPS Unit (Rack)
773
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
BLOWER RR 40A Blower RR Relay
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
SENSOR (B+) 10A Battery Sensor
B/ALARM HORN 10A B/Alarm Horn Relay
FUEL LID 10A Fuel Lid Relay
DEICER 15A Deicer Relay
FUEL PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay
HORN 15A Horn Relay
WIPER 25A Front Wiper (Low) Relay
ECU3 30A Engine Control Relay, Fuse - ECU1
REAR HEATED 40A Rear Heated Relay
TCU 15A Transmission Range Switch
MDPS 10A MDPS Unit (Rack)
CRUISE 10A Smart Cruise Control Radar
B/UP LAMP 10A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror
A/CON 7.5A Rear A/C Control Switch, A/C Control Module
ECU1 15A PCM
ABS3 7.5A ESC Module, Steering Angle Sensor
ECU2 10A Injector Drive Box
SENSOR1 15A Oxygen Sensor #1/#2/#3/#4, PCM, E/R Junction Box (Cooling Fan1 Relay)
SENSOR2 10A PCM, Canister Close Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve #1/#2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control
Valve #1/#2 (Intake), Oil Control Valve #1/#2 (Exhaust)
SENSOR3 10A PCM, Fuel Pump Relay
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1~#6, Condensor #1/#2
Maintenance
747
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽NOTICE
• If the light bulb or lamp connector
is removed from an operating
lamp activated by electricity, the
fuse box’s electronic device may
scan it as a malfunction.
Therefore, a lamp malfunction
history may be recorded in
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in
the fuse box.
• It is normal for an operating lamp
may blink temporarily. Since this
occurrence is due stabilization
function of the vehicle’s electronic
control device, if the lamp lights
up normally after temporary
blinking, there is no problem in
the vehicle.
However, if the lamp continues to
blink several times or turn off
completely, there may be an error
in the vehicle’s electronic control
device. So please have the vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer immediately.
If you don’t have necessary tools, the
correct bulbs and the expertise, con-
sult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.This is
especially true if you have to remove
the headlight assembly to get to the
bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION - Light replace-
ment
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
775
Maintenance
Front light bulb replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Turn signal light / Position light
(if equipped)
(4) Side marker light
(5) Front fog light (if equipped)
(6) Position light (if equipped)
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Turn signal light
(4) Side marker light
(5) Front fog light (if equipped)
(6) Position light
Headlight bulb
OXM079200N
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
OYP074016K
■Type A
OYP074016N
■Type B
Maintenance
767
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed in a
headlight.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
Headlamp (bulb type) -high/low
WARNING - HID
Headlamp low beam
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the light bulb does not
operate, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer. OYP074068N
OYP074069N
OYP074055N
High lamp
Low lamp
777
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the front cover(1) and
headlamp assembly nuts(2).
3. Remove the headlamp assembly
from the body of the vehicle
4. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
7. Inset a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Turn signal lamp/Position lamp
Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the pre-
vious page.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
✽✽NOTICE
If bulb will not rotate inside socket,
remove bulb, rotate 180°, and try
again.
OYP074056N
Maintenance
787
Front side marker
Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the pre-
vious page.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots on the
assembly and turning the socket
clockwise.
Front fog lamp bulbs
(if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under
cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on
the socket with the slots in the
housing. Push the socket into the
housing and turn the socket clock-
wise.
6. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover.
OYP074057N
OYP074058N
OYP074059N
OYP074060N
■Type A
■Type B
779
Maintenance
✽✽NOTICE
Always have the headlight aiming
adjusted after an accident or the
headlight assembly is reinstalled at a
authorized Kia dealer.
Headlamp (HID type), Front posi-
tion (LED), bulb replacement
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer
to last twice as long or longer than
halogen bulbs depending on their
frequency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point
in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the
same manner as halogen incandes-
cent lamps. If a headlamp goes out
after a period of operation but will
immediately relamp when the head-
lamp switch is cycled it is likely the
HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lamping components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen
bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.
Maintenance
807
Side repeater lamp replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not
operate,have the vehicle checked by
an authorized Kia dealer.
A skilled technician should check or
repair the side repeater lamp, for it
may damage related out side mirror
parts of the vehicle.
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Tail light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Back-up light
(5) Rear side marker light
Outside lamp
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing screws with a philips head
screwdriver.
OYP074019K
OYP074020K
■Type A
■Type B
OYP074018K
OYP074021K
OYP074022K
781
Maintenance
3. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
* If your vehicle is equipped with LED
type stop and tail lights replace with
LED assembled units. Please con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer.
Type B (Stop and tail lamp)
If the lamp bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OYP074023K
Maintenance
827
Inside lamp
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
* If your vehicle is equipped with LED
type stop and tail lights replace with
LED assembled units. Please con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer.
OYP074026K
OYP074024K
OYP074024N
■Type A
■Type B
783
Maintenance
High mounted stop lamp
replacement 1. Open the tailgate.
2. Gently remove the center cover of
the rear tailgate trim.
3. Disconnect the electrical connec-
tor.
4. Loosen the retaining nuts and
remove the spoiler.
5. Remove the high mounted stop
light assembly after loosening the
screws.
6. Reinstall a new light assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
License plate light bulb
replacement
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a phillips head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
OYP074027K
OYP074070N
OYP074071N
OXM073118
Maintenance
847
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
Room lamp
Map lamp
Glove box lamp
Luggage lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
OYP074029K/OYP074031K/OYP074054N/
OYP074032K/OYP074030K
WARNING - Interior lights
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
785
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-
rials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Maintenance
867
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
CAUTION - Wet engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
OJB037800
787
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or replace-
ment, be sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to the parts
repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, acid detergents
or strong detergents contain-
ing high alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to
the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
Maintenance
887
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of the doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergents It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
789
Maintenance
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the vehicle’s surface by
moisture that evaporates slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials. This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
beginning by observing the following:
Maintenance
907
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
ates a favorable environment for cor-
rosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can con-
tribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
791
Maintenance
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. If neces-
sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product
instructions for correct usage.
Maintenance
927
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
793
Maintenance
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with a
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Rear window
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage of the rear
window defroster grid.
Maintenance
947
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Maintenance booklet in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accor-
dance with the maintenance sched-
ule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
795
Maintenance
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Maintenance
967
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
797
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended sae viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8
28
DIMENSIONS
Specifications & Consumer information
Item mm (in)
Overall length 5,115 (201.4)
Overall width 1,985 (78.1)
Overall height Without Roof rack 1,740 (68.5)
With Roof rack 1,755 (69.1)
Tread
Front
235/65 R17 1,745 (68.7)
235/60 R18 1,740 (68.5)
235/55 R19 1,735 (68.3)
Rear
235/65 R17 1,752 (68.9)
235/60 R18 1,747 (68.8)
235/55 R19 1,742 (68.6)
Wheelbase 3,060 (120.5)
Item LAMBDA 3.3 GDI
Displacement cc (cu. in) 3,342 (203.94)
Bore x Stroke
mm (in.) 92 X 83.8 (3.62 X 3.29)
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6
No. of cylinders 6, V - type
ENGINE
83
BULB WATTAGE
Specifications & Consumer information
* If equipped
Light Bulb Wattage(W) Bulb type
Front
Headlamps (Low) 55 H7 S LL
Headlamps (Low) - HID type* 35 D3S
Headlamps (High) 55 H7 LL
Front turn signal lamps 28 PY28/8W
Front position lamps Bulb type 8 PY28/8W
LED type LED LED
Daytime running light 24 H7 LL
Front fog lamps MFR 35 H8
PROJ 55 HB4
Side Repeater lamps LED type LED LED
Side Marker lamps Bulb type 5 W5W
LED type LED LED
Rear
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) Bulb type 28 P28/8W
Rear tail lamps (Inside) 8 P28/8W
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) LED type LED LED
Rear tail lamps (Inside) LED LED
Rear turn signal lamps 28 P28/8W
Back-up lamps 16 W16W
Side Marker lamps Bulb type 5 W5W
LED type LED LED
High mounted stop lamp* LED type LED LED
License plate lamps 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 10 WEDGE
Room lamps 10 FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 WEDGE
Luggage lamp 10 FESTOON
48
TIRES AND WHEELS
Specifications & Consumer information
Item Tire size Wheel sizee
Inflation pressure [kPa (psi)] Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
Normal load *1Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
235/65 R17 6.5J X 17 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
9 ~ 11
(65 ~ 79, 88 ~ 107)
235/60 R18 7.0J X 18 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
235/55 R19 7.5J X 19 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
Compact spare tire T135/90 R17 4.0T X 17 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
*1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons
✽✽NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 21 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect-
ed soon.
Tires typically loose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every -11°C (12°F) temperature drop.
If extreme temperature variations are expected, re-check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly
inflated.
• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects
driving performance.
85
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
Specifications & Consumer information
Item LAMBDA 3.3 GDI
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.) 2,760 (6,085)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
LUGGAGE VOLUME
Item Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant 1,100 ± 25g R-134a
Compressor lubricant 210 ± 10g PAG (FD46XG)
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
Item LAMBDA 3.3 GDI
Luggage volume (SAE)
l(cu ft)
960 (33.9)
❈BEHIND 3RD ROW
68
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
*1Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute
to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements
are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *1*2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
(or equivalent)
Lambda 3.3
GDI Engine 5.7L (6.02 US qt.)
ACEA A5 or above
* If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in
your country, you are able to use API service SL,
IL SAC GF-3, ACEA A3.
Automatic transaxle fluid Lambda 3.3
GDI Engine 7.8L (8.24 US qt.) ATF SP-IV or equivalent
Coolant Lambda 3.3
GDI Engine 11.5L (12.15 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for
aluminum radiator)
Power steering fluid (if equipped) 1.0~1.5L
(1.06~1.59 US qt.) PSF-4
Brake fluid 0.58~0.62L
(0.61~0.66 US qt.) SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel 80L (84.54 US qt.) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in chapter 1
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle
will be operated in before the next oil
change.
Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Engine Oil *1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
*1For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil
is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the
engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
5W-30
87
Specifications & Consumer information
88
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger seat. To
check the number, remove the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
OYP084001N OVQ076002N
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OYP084002K
89
Specifications & Consumer information
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
ENGINE NUMBER
OYP084005N
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
OYP084003K
Index
I
Index
2
I
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
When Active ECO is activated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . . 3-5
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
How does the air bag system operate. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
Aux, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-203
CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215, 264
How vehicle audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-204
Steering wheel remote controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-163
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
From the front seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
From the rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Outside thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Rear climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
A
I3
Index
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph): . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on . . 5-35
To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Automatic door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
C
B
D
Index
4
I
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle . . . . . 4-27
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-25
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Comfort mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Drive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
ECO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Push-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 7-3
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Checking the coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Engine START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine START/STOP button position . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Illuminated engine START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-26
Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Foward collision warning system (FCWS) . . . . . . . . . 5-68
FCWS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Limitations of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Engine compartment fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Inner panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
F
E
I5
Index
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Jack and tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Use of temporary compact spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
LCD display control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
AC inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-196
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-196
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
Floor mat anchor (s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-197
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
Seat cooler (air ventilation seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-191
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
Side curtain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-197
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
USB charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-195
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Luggage lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Portable lamp usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
G
H
I
Index
6
I
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Lane departure warning system (LDWS). . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
The LDWS does not operate when:. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
LCD modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
SCC/LDWS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Front light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-80
Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Headlight escort function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Rear climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
K
L
M
I7
Index
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Operation of the parking assist system . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Self-diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Power sliding door and power tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Automatic stop and reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
How to reset the power sliding door and
power tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Power door ON/OFF button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Power sliding door operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Power tailgate non-opening conditions . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Power tailgate opening height user setting . . . . . . . 4-44
Power tailgate operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Smart Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Checking the power steering fluid level . . . . . . . . 7-36
Checking the power steering hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-121
Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Self-diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Rearview camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Driver position memory system (for power seat) . . 3-10
Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Front seat adjustment - Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Headrest (for front seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Headrest (for rear seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
O
P
R
S
Index
8
I
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Smart cruise control system (SCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Limitations of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Speed setting (SCC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
To adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control . . 5-46
To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (SCC) . . . . . . . . 5-42
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Reducing the risk of a rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Electric power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Rear sunroof lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Tailgate (for manual tailgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Closing the tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
T
I9
Index
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-49
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Maintenance when trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Vehicle break-in process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . . . . . . 1-7
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
GVW (Gross vehicle weight). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Warning and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
V
W
Index
10
I
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181
Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-79
Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Don’t let your parking brake freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-80
Snowy or icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
To keep locks from freezing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . 5-79
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Windshield wiper/washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
360° camera monitoring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
ETC
